Preface
Contents
Overview
Machine Features
Color and Image Quality Functions
- Basic Color Modes
- Adjusting Image Quality and Color
Guides Provided with the Machine
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Structure of the guide
- Conventions Used in This Guide
Menu Map
1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
3 Preparation before Use
4 Printing from PC
5 Operation on the Machine
6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
7 Status/Job Cancel
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- System Menu
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

KYOCERA 4012i User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for 4012i by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

KYOCERA P7040cdn Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 306ci Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 2552ci MFP A3 Colour Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 6052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 3252CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 4052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 5052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

PRINT COPY SCAN FAX

OPERATION GUIDE

TASKalfa 3212i

TASKalfa 4012i

> Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this machine.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take

simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.

We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality

control testing, to maintain quality.

The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.

We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number

before contacting your Service Representative.

Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i

Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii

Overview ................................................................................................................................ xi

Machine Features ................................................................................................................. xii

Color and Image Quality Functions.................................................................................. xvii

Basic Color Modes ..................................................................................................... xvii

Adjusting Image Quality and Color............................................................................. xviii

Guides Provided with the Machine.................................................................................... xix

About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ........................................................................... xxi

Structure of the guide.................................................................................................. xxi

Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................ xxii

Menu Map............................................................................................................................ xxv

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................... 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2

Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................. 1-8

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-8

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................ 1-9

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................. 1-10

EN ISO 7779 ........................................................................................................... 1-10

EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................... 1-10

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................... 1-10

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ............................... 1-10

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ............................................................... 1-11

Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-12

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-18

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-18

Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-18

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-18

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-18

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine ..................................................... 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-6

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-8

Power On/Off ..................................................................................................................... 2-9

Power On .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Power Off .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ...................................................................... 2-11

Assigning Functions to Function Keys .................................................................... 2-12

Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-14

Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-14

iii

Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-18

Display Setting Screen ............................................................................................ 2-18

Functions Key ......................................................................................................... 2-19

Using the Screen ..................................................................................................... 2-19

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-20

Original Preview ...................................................................................................... 2-20

Entering Numbers ................................................................................................... 2-23

Using the Enter Key ................................................................................................ 2-24

Using the Quick No. Search Key ............................................................................. 2-24

Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-25

Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View) ........................................................ 2-26

Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-27

Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-27

Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-28

Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-29

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-29

Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-30

Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-30

Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-32

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-36

Configuring NFC ..................................................................................................... 2-38

Energy Saver Function ................................................................................................... 2-39

Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-39

Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-39

Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-40

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-40

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................ 2-40

Energy Saver Recovery Level ................................................................................. 2-40

Weekly Timer Settings ............................................................................................ 2-40

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) ..................................................................... 2-41

Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-42

Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-45

Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-45

Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-46

Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-52

Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-53

Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-55

Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-57

Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-58

Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-59

Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-59

Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-59

Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-61

Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-62

Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-63

Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-64

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-65

Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-69

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-70

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box .......................................................... 2-71

Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-73

Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-73

3 Preparation before Use ............................................................................. 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3

Loading in the Cassettes ........................................................................................... 3-4

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ...................................................................... 3-7

Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................. 3-11

Paper Stopper ......................................................................................................... 3-11

Envelope Stack Guide ............................................................................................. 3-11

Stack Level Adjuster ............................................................................................... 3-12

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-13

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-13

Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-14

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-15

Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-18

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-23

Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-23

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-30

4 Printing from PC ........................................................................................ 4-1

Printer Driver Properties Screen ............................................................................... 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6

Canceling Printing from a Computer ......................................................................... 4-9

Printing from the Handheld Device ............................................................................... 4-10

Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 4-10

Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................ 4-10

Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 4-10

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 4-10

Printing with NFC .................................................................................................... 4-11

Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-12

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-12

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-13

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-13

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-14

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-14

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-15

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-15

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-16

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-16

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-17

Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-17

Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-17

Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-18

Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-18

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-18

Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-19

Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-19

Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-20

5 Operation on the Machine ........................................................................ 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-6

Program .............................................................................................................................. 5-9

Registering Programs ............................................................................................. 5-10

Recalling Programs ................................................................................................. 5-10

Editing Programs ..................................................................................................... 5-11

Deleting Programs .................................................................................................. 5-11

Application ....................................................................................................................... 5-12

Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 5-12

Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-13

Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-14

Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-14

Registering Shortcuts

(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 5-15

Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-15

Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-16

Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-16

Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-17

Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-17

Proof Copy .............................................................................................................. 5-19

Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-20

Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-20

Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-21

Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-22

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-22

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-22

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-23

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-23

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-23

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-26

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-26

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-26

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-28

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-28

Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-28

Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box .............................................................. 5-29

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-29

Scanning Document Stored in a Box ...................................................................... 5-29

Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-30

WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-31

Installing the Driver ................................................................................................. 5-31

Executing WSD scan .............................................................................................. 5-32

DSM Scan ......................................................................................................................... 5-34

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-34

Executing DSM Scan .............................................................................................. 5-34

Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-36

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-36

Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original ........................................................... 5-36

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-37

Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-38

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-38

Sending a Document to the Mail Address of the Logged In User ........................... 5-38

Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-39

Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-40

Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-40

Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-40

Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-42

Choosing from the Speed Dial ................................................................................ 5-42

Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-43

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-44

Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-45

How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-46

Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-47

What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 5-47

What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-47

What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 5-48

Fax Box ................................................................................................................... 5-48

Basic Operation for Document Box ......................................................................... 5-48

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-52

Editing Custom Box ................................................................................................. 5-53

Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 5-54

Storing Documents to a Custom Box ...................................................................... 5-54

Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-55

Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ....................................................... 5-56

Sending Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-57

Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged In User. ........... 5-58

Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-58

Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes ............................................ 5-59

Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable Memory .................................. 5-59

Joining Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-60

Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-61

Job Box ............................................................................................................................ 5-62

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ................................................................................. 5-62

Form for Form Overlay ............................................................................................ 5-62

Operating using Removable USB Memory ................................................................... 5-64

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................ 5-64

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................ 5-66

Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-67

Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-67

Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................ 5-68

Launching and Exiting the Browser ......................................................................... 5-68

Using the Browser Screen ...................................................................................... 5-69

Manual Staple .................................................................................................................. 5-70

6 Using Various Functions .......................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2

How to Select Functions ........................................................................................... 6-2

Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-5

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) ................................................................... 6-8

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................ 6-14

Functions ......................................................................................................................... 6-17

Original Size ............................................................................................................ 6-18

Paper Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-19

Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-20

Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-23

Collate/Offset .......................................................................................................... 6-24

Staple/Punch ........................................................................................................... 6-25

Paper Output ........................................................................................................... 6-28

Density .................................................................................................................... 6-29

Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-29

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-30

Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-30

Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-31

Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-31

Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-32

Prevent Bleed-thru .................................................................................................. 6-32

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-33

Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-36

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering ...................................................................... 6-38

Border Erase ........................................................................................................... 6-39

Booklet .................................................................................................................... 6-41

Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-44

Cover ....................................................................................................................... 6-47

Form Overlay .......................................................................................................... 6-48

vii

Erase Shadowed Areas .......................................................................................... 6-49

Page # ..................................................................................................................... 6-49

Insert Sheets/Chapters ........................................................................................... 6-51

Memo Page ............................................................................................................. 6-52

Image Repeat .......................................................................................................... 6-54

Text Stamp .............................................................................................................. 6-55

Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................ 6-58

Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-61

Auto Image Rotation ............................................................................................... 6-61

Negative Image ....................................................................................................... 6-62

Mirror Image ............................................................................................................ 6-62

Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-62

File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-63

Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-63

Repeat Copy ........................................................................................................... 6-64

DP Read Action ....................................................................................................... 6-65

Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-65

2-sided/Book Original, Book Original ...................................................................... 6-66

Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-67

File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-68

File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-73

Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-73

E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................ 6-74

Send and Print ........................................................................................................ 6-74

Send and Store ....................................................................................................... 6-74

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-75

File Size Confirmation ............................................................................................. 6-75

Delete after Printed ................................................................................................. 6-75

Delete after Transmitted .......................................................................................... 6-75

Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-76

Long Original ........................................................................................................... 6-76

Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-77

JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-77

XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-77

7 Status/Job Cancel ..................................................................................... 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-8

Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-9

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ....................................................... 7-10

Sending the Log History .......................................................................................... 7-10

Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-11

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-11

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-11

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................... 7-11

Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................. 7-12

Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-13

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-14

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) .................................................. 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-4

Counter ..................................................................................................................... 8-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ....................................................................................... 8-7

Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-10

Home ....................................................................................................................... 8-31

viii

Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-32

Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-33

Document Box/Removable Memory ....................................................................... 8-38

FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-39

Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-39

Report ..................................................................................................................... 8-42

System/Network ...................................................................................................... 8-47

Edit Destination ....................................................................................................... 8-69

User Login/Job Accounting ..................................................................................... 8-70

User Property .......................................................................................................... 8-70

Date/Timer/Energy Saver ........................................................................................ 8-70

Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-74

Internet .................................................................................................................... 8-76

Application ............................................................................................................... 8-76

9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) .. 9-1

Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2

Managing the Job Account from PC ......................................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning ..................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning .......................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC ......................................................... 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-5

Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-5

Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-8

Changing User Properties ....................................................................................... 9-11

User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-14

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-15

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-16

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-17

Local Authorization .................................................................................................. 9-18

Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-19

Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-22

Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-25

Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-27

ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-30

PIN Code Authorization ........................................................................................... 9-31

Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-32

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-32

Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-33

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ..................... 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN ................................................. 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA ...................................................... 9-33

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC ...................................................... 9-33

Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-34

Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-35

Job Accounting (Local) .................................................................................................. 9-36

Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-36

Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-37

Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-38

Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-39

Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-40

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-41

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-42

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-43

Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-44

Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-44

Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-46

Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-48

Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-49

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-49

Apply Limit ....................................................................................................................... 9-50

Copy/Printer Count ......................................................................................................... 9-51

Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-52

Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-52

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-53

10 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor ........................................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Glass .................................................................................................. 10-3

Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-4

Replace the Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 10-7

Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-9

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-10

Replacing Staples (3,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................ 10-11

Disposing of the Punch Waste .............................................................................. 10-13

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-16

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-16

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-16

Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-20

Remote Operation ................................................................................................. 10-23

Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-25

Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-41

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-41

Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................ 10-41

Drum Refresh 1 ..................................................................................................... 10-42

Drum Refresh 2 ..................................................................................................... 10-43

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-44

Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-44

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-45

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-47

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (500-sheet×2) ..................................... 10-49

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-51

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (500-sheet×2) ..................................... 10-52

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-54

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-57

Remove any jammed paper in Duplex Unit ........................................................... 10-58

Remove any jammed paper in Inner Tray / Fixing Unit ......................................... 10-60

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 ....................................................... 10-62

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (500-sheet×2/1,500-sheet×2) ........ 10-63

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-64

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-65

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (DP-7100) .................... 10-66

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (DP-7120) .................... 10-68

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (DP-7110) .................... 10-70

Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................................... 10-72

Remove any jammed paper in the 3,000-Sheet Finisher (Inner) .......................... 10-75

Remove any jammed paper in the 3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray A) ........................ 10-76

Remove any jammed paper in the 3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray B) ........................ 10-80

Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................... 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher .............................................. 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 3,000-Sheet Finisher .............................................. 10-86

11 Appendix .................................................................................................. 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-7

Starting Application Use .......................................................................................... 11-7

Checking Details of Application ............................................................................... 11-8

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-9

Entry Screens .......................................................................................................... 11-9

Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-11

Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-12

Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-12

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-13

Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-15

Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-19

Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-19

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-21

Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-22

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-22

Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-23

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................. 11-23

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................... 11-24

1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-24

3,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-25

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................. 11-25

Mailbox (For 3,000-Sheet Finisher) ....................................................................... 11-26

Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-27

Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1

> Overview

Overview

NOTE

• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:

Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)

• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.

Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)

• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:

Preparation before Use (page 3-1)

Operations from your PC

Copy functions

Printer functions

Fax functionsUSB memorySend functions

Document Box functions

Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB memory

Output Data

Application

SecurityInput Data

FAX

Operation

Guide

This function serves a variety of

purposes, including saving data in the

machine and on a USB memory stick.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

(page 4-12)

Creating a New Custom Box

(page 5-52)

You can expand the machine functions

according to your needs.

Application (page 5-12)

You can apply the various machine security

levels to your specific needs.

Strengthen security (page xiv)

Frequently-Used

Sending Method

(page 5-21)

Command Center RX

You can check the status and change

the settings of the machine from a

Web browser on your computer.

Command Center RX (page 2-61)

Command Center RX User

Guide

Copying (page 5-17)

Printing from PC (page 4-1)

Saving Documents

to USB Memory

(Scan to USB)

(page 5-66)

xii

> Machine Features

Machine Features

The machine is equipped with many useful functions.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

Here are some examples.

Optimize your office workflow

Access to frequently used

functions with just one touch

(Favorites)

You can preset frequently used

functions.

Once you register frequently used

settings as favorite, you can call up

the settings easily. Using this favorite

brings the same results even if

operated by another person.

Program (page 5-9)

Interrupt other running jobs and

execute your copy job immediately

(Interrupt Copy)

You can interrupt other running jobs

and execute your copy job

immediately. When other users are

copying a large number of sheets,

this function allows you to interrupt

those jobs and make your copies

immediately.

When the interruption copy ends, the

machine resumes the paused print

jobs.

Interrupt Copy (page 5-20)

Check the finishing before copying

a large number of sheets

(Proof Copy)

It is possible to copy one sheet

before copying a large number of

sheets. This enables you to check the

contents and finishing and copy the

desired number of sheets without

scanning the original again if you are

satisfied with the result. If you want to

make changes, you can change the

settings and copy only one sheet

again.

Proof Copy (page 5-19)

Optimize your office workflow

Scan originals of different sizes at

a time (Mixed Size Originals)

It is useful when preparing

conference materials.

You can set the different sized

originals at one time so you don't

need to reset the originals regardless

of size.

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)

Scan a large number of originals in

separate batches and produce as

one job (Continuous Scan)

It is useful when preparing many-

page handouts.

When a large number of originals

cannot be placed in the document

processor at one time, the originals

can be scanned in separate batches

and then copied or sent as one job.

Continuous Scan (page 6-61)

Send one time with multiple

sending options (Multi Sending)

You can send a same document to

the multiple destinations using a

different method.

You can specify multiple destinations

of different send methods such as E-

mail, SMB, and Fax.

You can reduce your workflow by

sending a job at once.

Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending)

(page 5-37)

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

xiii

> Machine Features

Optimize your office workflow Save energy and cost

Save frequently used documents

in the machine (Custom Box)

You can save the frequently used

document in the machine and print it

when needed.

Creating a New Custom Box

(page 5-52)

Save energy as needed

(Energy Saver function)

The machine is equipped with Energy

Saver function that automatically

switched into Low Power Mode or

Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate

Energy Saver Recovery Level

depending on the operation.

In addition, set the machine to

automatically turn OFF and recovered

at a specified time for each day of the

week.

Energy Saver Function

(page 2-39)

Reduce paper use

(Paper Saving Printing)

You can print originals on both sides

of the paper. You can also print

multiple originals onto one sheet.

Program (page 5-9)

Save energy and cost Create attractive documents

Skip blank pages when printing

(Skip Blank Page)

When there are blank pages in a

scanned document, this function

skips the blank pages and prints only

pages that are not blank.

Skip Blank Page (page 6-65)

Prevent image bleed-through

(Prevent Bleed-through)

You can prevent image bleed-through

from the reverse side when scanning

thin originals.

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Erase the extra shaded area

(Erase Shadowed Areas)

When scanning with the document

processor or original cover open,

erase the extra shaded area.

Erase Shadowed Areas

(page 6-49)

On Off

xiv

> Machine Features

Create attractive documents

Create a booklet (Booklet)

It is useful when preparing handout. You can create a

magazine, pamphlet, or other booklet from sheet

originals.

Facing-page, two-sided copies of originals can be folded

down the center to create a booklet.

The cover page can be printed onto colored paper or

heavy paper.

Booklet (page 6-41)

Print a stamp on copies (Text Stamp / Bates Stamp)

It is useful when adding text or date that is not included in

originals.

You can add desired text and date as a stamp.

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

Strengthen security

Password-protect a PDF file

(PDF Encryption Functions)

Use the PDF format's password

security options to restrict document

viewing, printing and editing.

Encrypted PDF Password

(page 6-77)

Protect data on the hard disk/SSD

(Encryption / Overwrite)

You can overwrite the unnecessary

data that remains on the hard disk/

SSD automatically.

To prevent an external leakage, the

machine is able to encrypt data

before writing it to the hard disk/SSD.

Data Security (page 8-65)

Prevent loss of finished

documents (Private Print)

Temporarily saving print jobs in the

main unit document box and

outputting them when in front of the

device can prevent documents from

being taken by others.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

(page 4-12)

> Machine Features

Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently

(Card Authentication)

You can log in simply by touching an

ID card. You don't need to enter your

user name and password.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card

Authentication Kit" (page 11-5)

Strengthen security

(Settings for Administrator)

Various functions are available for

administrators to strengthen security.

Strengthening the Security

(page 2-59)

Expand functions as necessary

(Application)

The functionality of the machine can

be expanded by installing

applications.

Applications that help you perform

your daily more efficiently such as a

scan feature and an authentication

feature are available.

Application (page 5-12)

Use functions more efficiently

Display file size before sending /

storing a job

(File Size Confirmation)

You can check the file size before

sending/storing the document.

If your server specifies an e-mail size

limit, you can check and change the

size in advance.

File Size Confirmation

(page 6-75)

Install the machine without

concerning the network cables

(Wireless Network)

If there is a wireless LAN

environment, it is possible to install

the unit without worrying about the

network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi

Direct, etc. are supported.

Configuring the Wireless Network

(page 2-32)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-36)

Configuring NFC (page 2-38)

Use USB memory

(USB Memory)

It is useful when you need to print

documents outside your office or you

cannot print documents from your

PC.

You can print the document from the

USB memory by plugging it directly

into the machine.

Original scanned at the machine can

be saved in the USB memory also.

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Memory

(page 5-64)

Saving Documents to USB

Memory (Scan to USB)

(page 5-66)

OK !

1 MB

xvi

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Specify image file format

(File Format)

You can select the various file

formats when sending/storing

images.

File Format (page 6-68)

Scan the long originals

(Long Original)

You can scan the long originals such

as Contract and Data log.

Long Original (page 6-76)

Skip the error job

(Job Skip Functions)

When paper empty error occurs at

the cassette by specifying the special

paper size or type, the machine skips

the error job and perform the next

job.

Error Job Skip (page 8-71)

Use functions more efficiently

Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)

You can access to the machine

remotely to print, send or download

data.

Administrators can configure the

machine behavior or management

settings.

Command Center RX

(page 2-61)

xvii

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.

Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.

For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-30)

Color mode Description

Reference image Reference

page

Before After

Color/Gray

Color/B & W

Automatically recognizes whether a

document being scanned is color or

black & white.

page 6-30

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-30

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-30

Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-30

xviii

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.

I want to...

Sample image

Function Page

Before After

Easily adjust the image quality to match your own image

Remove dark background or

bleed-through from the original

such as a newspaper.

Program

[Newspaper Copy]

page 5-9

Clearly reproduce fine lines, faint

lines, broken lines, and other fine

details in a CAD or other

drawings.

Program

[Drawing Copy]

page 5-9

Adjust the image quality precisely

Adjust the density. Density page 6-29

Emphasize or blur the image

outline.

Example: Emphasize the image

outlines

Sharpness page 6-31

Adjust the difference between

dark and light parts of the image.

Contrast page 6-31

Darken or lighten the background

(the area with no texts or images)

of a document.

Example: Lightening the

background

Background Density page 6-32

Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided

originals.

Prevent Bleed-

through

page 6-32

Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and

produce the characters clearly.

File format

[High Comp. PDF]

page 6-68

Convert a paper document to PDF

with searchable text.

File format [PDF] or

[High Comp. PDF]

with [OCR]

page 6-68

xix

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.

The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine

performance.

Printed Guides

Start using the

machine quickly

Quick Guide

Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient

features, how to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems

occur.

For safe use of the

machine

Safety Guide

Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of

the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (TASKalfa 3212i/TASKalfa 4012i)

Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the

cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before

using the machine.

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.

Version 8.0 or later

Use the machine

thoughtfully

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and

indicates default settings and other information.

Use the fax functions FAX Operation Guide

Explains how to use the fax function.

Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.

Strengthen security

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to overwrite and

encrypt data.

Easily register

machine information

and configure settings

Command Center RX User Guide

Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to

check and change settings.

Print data from a

computer

Printer Driver User Guide

Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.

Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.

Monitor the machine

and printers on the

network

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with

KYOCERA Net Viewer.

Scan images and save

with information

File Management Utility User Guide

Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send

and save scanned documents.

Print without using the

printer driver

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of

emulation.

xxi

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide

The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter Contents

1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.

2Installing and Setting up the

Machine

Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login,

logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.

3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the

machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.

4Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.

5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals,

making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.

6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.

7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel

jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and

toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax

transmission.

8Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.

9User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login,

Job Accounting)

Explains user login and job accounting.

10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam

or other problem occurs.

11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides

information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms.

Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.

xxii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.

Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.

NOTE

The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not

appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.

Convention Description

[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Click to move from the current page to the previously

displayed page. This is convenient when you want to

return to the page from which you jumped to the

current page.

Click an item in the Table of

Contents to jump to the

corresponding page.

CAUTION

Indicates that personal injury or

mechanical damage may result

from insufficient attention to or

incorrect compliance with the

related points.

NOTE

Indicates supplemental

explanations and reference

information for operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational

requirements and restrictions to

operate the machine correctly,

and avoid damage to the

machine or property.

Refer to

Click the underlined text to jump

to the corresponding page.

xxiii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in Procedures for Operating the Machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.



Select [ ].



Select [Common Settings].



Select [Sound].

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] >

[Sound]

Select [Next] of "Job Accounting Settings".



Select [Change] of "Job Accounting ".

"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting"

[Change]

User Login/Job Accounting

User Login Setting:

Status

Unknown User Settings:

Job Accounting Setting:

m020168

User Login/Job Accounting - Job Accounting Setting

Change

Job Accounting:

Status

Job Accounting Access:

Job Accounting (Local): Apply Limit:

Copy/Printer Count:

Change

m020174

xxiv

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Size and Orientation of Originals and Paper

Original sizes and paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To

distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation. In

addition, the following icons are used to indicate original and paper placement orientations on the touch panel.

Orientation Setting Position

(X=Length, Y=Width)

Icons on the touch

panel

Indicated size in this

Guide*1

*1 Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the

following.

Specifications (page 11-19)

Vertical

orientation

Original

Original Original

A4, B5, Letter .etc

Paper

Paper Paper

Horizontal

orientation

(-R)

Original

Original Original

A4-R, B5-R, Letter-R

.etc

Paper

Paper Paper

xxv

> Menu Map

Menu Map

This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.

Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.

Org./Paper/Finishing Original Size (page 6-18)

Paper Selection (page 6-19)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

Collate/Offset (page 6-24)

Staple/Punch Staple (page 6-25)

Punch (page 6-26)

Paper Output (page 6-28)

Image Quality Density (page 6-29)

Original Image (page 6-29)

EcoPrint (page 6-30)

Sharpness (page 6-31)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-32)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Contrast (page 6-31)

Copy

xxvi

> Menu Map

Layout/Edit Zoom (page 6-33)

Combine (page 6-36)

Margin/Centering (page 6-38)

Border Erase (page 6-39)

Booklet (page 6-41)

Duplex (page 6-44)

Form Overlay (page 6-48)

Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-49)

Page # (page 6-49)

Cover (page 6-47)

Insert Sheets/Chapters (page 6-51)

Image Repeat (page 6-54)

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

Memo Page (page 6-52)

Advanced Setup Continuous Scan (page 6-61)

Auto Image Rotation (page 6-61)

Negative Image (page 6-62)

Mirror Image (page 6-62)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

Priority Override (page 6-63)

Repeat Copy (page 6-64)

DP Read Action (page 6-65)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-65)

Program (page 5-9)

xxvii

> Menu Map

Destination Address Book (page 5-40)

E-mail Addr Entry (page 5-22)

Folder Path Entry (page 5-23, page 5-26)

FAX No. Entry (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

i-FAX Address Entry (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

WSD Scan (page 5-31) / DSM Scan (page 5-34)

Org./Sending Data Format Original Size (page 6-18)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)

2-sided/Book Original, Book Original (page 6-66)

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

Sending Size (page 6-67)

File Format (page 6-68)

File Separation (page 6-73)

Long Original (page 6-76)

Color/Image Quality Density (page 6-29)

Original Image (page 6-29)

Scan Resolution (page 6-73)

FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Color Selection (page 6-30)

Sharpness (page 6-31)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-32)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Contrast (page 6-31)

Send

xxviii

> Menu Map

Advanced Setup Zoom (page 6-33)

Centering (page 6-38)

Border Erase (page 6-39)

FAX Delayed Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Continuous Scan (page 6-61)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-49)

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

i-FAX Subject/Body (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

FAX Direct Transmission (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

FAX Polling RX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Send and Print (page 6-74)

Send and Store (page 6-74)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-75)

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

File Size Confirmation (page 6-75)

FAX TX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-65)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-74)

Program (page 5-9)

xxix

> Menu Map

Custom Box Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-18)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)

2-sided/Book Original, Book Original (page 6-66)

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

Storing Size (page 6-76)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Density (page 6-29)

Original Image (page 6-29)

Scan Resolution (page 6-73)

Color Selection (page 6-30)

Sharpness (page 6-31)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-32)

Zoom (page 6-33)

Centering (page 6-38)

Border Erase (page 6-39)

Continuous Scan (page 6-61)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-49)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-65)

Contrast (page 6-31)

Program (page 5-9)

Detail (page 5-48)

Custom Box

xxx

> Menu Map

Custom Box Open Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-19)

Collate/Offset (page 6-24)

Staple/Punch

(page 6-25)

Staple (page 6-25)

Punch (page 6-26)

Paper Output (page 6-28)

Combine (page 6-36)

Margin/Centering (page 6-38)

Booklet (page 6-41)

Duplex (page 6-44)

Cover (page 6-47)

Form Overlay (page 6-48)

Page # (page 6-49)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

Delete after Printed (page 6-75)

Priority Override (page 6-63)

EcoPrint (page 6-30)

Zoom (page 6-33)

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

Image

Quality

Density (page 6-29)

Original Image (page 6-29)

Sharpness (page 6-31)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-32)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Contrast (page 6-31)

Program (page 5-9)

xxxi

> Menu Map

Custom Box Open Send Destination (page 5-40)

Functions Sending Size (page 6-67)

File Format (page 6-68)

FAX TX Resolution

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Centering (page 6-38)

FAX Delayed Transmission

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-74)

i-FAX Subject/Body

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-75)

Delete after Transmitted (page 6-75)

Zoom (page 6-33)

File Separation (page 6-73)

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

File Size Confirmation (page 6-75)

FAX TX Report

(refer to

FAX Operation Guide

)

Color/Image

Quality

Density (page 6-29)

Original Image (page 6-29)

Resolution (page 6-73)

Color Selection (page 6-30)

Sharpness (page 6-31)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-32)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Contrast (page 6-31)

Program (page 5-9)

xxxii

> Menu Map

Custom Box Open Join (page 5-60)

Move/Copy (page 5-58)

Delete (page 5-61)

Store File (page 5-54)

Search(Name) (page 5-48)

Page Selection (page 5-48)

Detail (page 5-48)

Preview (page 5-51)

Search(Name) (page 5-48)

Search(No.) (page 5-48)

Add/Edit Box (page 5-52)

xxxiii

> Menu Map

Job Box Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-13, page 4-14)

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-15, page 4-16)

Repeat Copy (page 6-64)

Form for Form Overlay (page 5-62)

Job Box

xxxiv

> Menu Map

Removable

Memory

Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-19)

Collate/Offset (page 6-24)

Staple/Punch (page 6-25)Staple (page 6-25)

Punch (page 6-26)

Paper Output (page 6-28)

Margin (page 6-38)

Duplex (page 6-44)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

Priority Override (page 6-63)

EcoPrint (page 6-30)

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-77)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-77)

XPS Fit to Page (page 6-77)

Removable

Memory

xxxv

> Menu Map

Removable

Memory

Store File Functions Original Size (page 6-18)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)

2-sided/Book Original, Book Original (page 6-66)

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

Storing Size (page 6-76)

Prevent Bleed-thru (page 6-32)

Density (page 6-29)

Original Image (page 6-29)

Scan Resolution (page 6-73)

Color Selection (page 6-30)

Sharpness (page 6-31)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-32)

Zoom (page 6-33)

Centering (page 6-38)

Border Erase (page 6-39)

Continuous Scan (page 6-61)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-62)

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

Erase Shadowed Area (page 6-49)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-65)

Contrast (page 6-31)

Text Stamp (page 6-55)

Bates Stamp (page 6-58)

File Format (page 6-68)

File Separation (page 6-73)

Long Original (page 6-76)

Delete (page 5-49)

Detail (page 5-48)

Memory Information (page 5-67)

Remove Memory (page 5-67)

FAX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

xxxvi

> Menu Map

Printing Jobs (page 7-3)

Sending Jobs (page 7-5)

Storing Jobs (page 7-6)

Device/Communication (page 7-13)

Paper/Supplies (page 7-14)

St t

Status/

Job Cancel I

xxxvii

> Menu Map

Quick Setup Wizard FAX Setup (page 2-42)

Energy Saver Setup (page 2-42)

Network Setup (page 2-43)

Counter (page 2-58)

Cassette/MP Tray Settings Cassette 1 (page 8-7)

Cassette 2 (page 8-7)

Cassette 3 (page 8-7)

Cassette 4 (page 8-7)

MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)

Common Settings Language (page 8-10)

Default Screen (page 8-10)

Sound Buzzer (page 8-10)

FAX Speaker Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

FAX Monitor Volume (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Keyboard Layout (page 8-11)

Original/Paper

Settings

Custom Original Size (page 8-11)

Custom Paper Size (page 8-12)

Media Type Setting (page 8-12)

Default Paper Source (page 8-12)

Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)

Media for Auto (B&W) (page 8-13)

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

Separator Paper Source (page 8-14)

Show Paper Setup Message (page 8-14)

Measurement (page 8-15)

System

xxxviii

> Menu Map

Common Settings Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 8-16)

Finishing Error (page 8-16)

No Staple Error (page 8-16)

Finished Pages Exceeded (page 8-16)

Punch Waste Full Error (page 8-16)

Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-16)

Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 8-17)

Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-17)

Paper Output (page 8-17)

Orientation Confirmation (page 8-18)

Function Defaults Orig. Orientation (Copy) (page 8-18)

Orig. Orient.(Send/Store) (page 8-18)

Original Image (Copy) (page 8-18)

Org. Image (Send/Store) (page 8-18)

FAX TX Resolution (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Scan Resolution (page 8-18)

Color Selection (page 8-18)

File Format (page 8-18)

Backgrnd Density (Copy) (page 8-18)

BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) (page 8-18)

Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) (page 8-18)

Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) (page 8-19)

Zoom (page 8-19)

Border Erase Default (page 8-19)

Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-19)

Margin Default (page 8-19)

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-19)

EcoPrint (page 8-19)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-19)

High Comp. PDF Image (page 8-19)

Color TIFF Compression (page 8-19)

Image Quality (File Format) (page 8-19)

xxxix

> Menu Map

Common Settings Function Defaults Collate/Offset (page 8-19)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-20)

XPS Fit to Page (page 8-20)

PDF/A (page 8-20)

File Name Entry (page 8-20)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-20)

i-FAX Subject/Body (page 8-20)

DP Read Action (page 8-20)

OCR Text Recognition (page 8-20)

Primary OCR Language (page 8-20)

Repeat Copy (page 8-21)

Skip Blank Page (Copy) (page 8-21)

Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) (page 8-21)

File Separation (page 8-21)

Continuous Scan (Copy) (page 8-21)

Continuous Scan (FAX) (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Continuous Scan (Send/Store) (page 8-21)

Optional Keyboard Type (page 8-21)

System Stamp (page 8-22)

Manual Staple (page 8-28)

Offset Documents by Job (page 8-28)

Low Toner Alert (page 8-29)

Offset One Page Documents (page 8-29)

Display Status/Log (page 8-29)

Customize Status Display (page 8-29)

Message Board Settings (page 8-30)

Remote Printing (page 8-30)

Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-31)

Prevent Light Reflection (page 8-31)

Function Key Assignment (page 8-31)

Show Power Off Message (page 8-31)

> Menu Map

Home Customize Desktop (page 2-15)

Customize Taskbar (page 2-15)

Wallpaper (page 2-15)

Copy Paper Selection (page 8-32)

Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-32)

Auto Paper Selection (page 8-32)

Auto % Priority (page 8-32)

Paper Size for Small Original (page 8-32)

Preset Limit (page 8-32)

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-32)

Quick Setup Registration (page 8-32)

Send Quick Setup Registration (page 8-33)

Dest. Check before Send (page 8-33)

Color Type (page 8-33)

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-33)

Default Screen (page 8-33)

Send and Forward (page 8-34)

New Destination Entry (page 8-34)

Recall Destination (page 8-34)

Broadcast (page 8-34)

HighCompressionPDF Mode (page 8-35)

OCR Text Recognition Act. (page 8-35)

Document Box/Removable

Memory

Custom Box (page 5-47)

FAX Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)

Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-38)

Polling Box (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Quick Setup Registration (page 8-39)

FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

xli

> Menu Map

Printer Emulation (page 8-39)

EcoPrint (page 8-40)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-40)

Override A4/Letter (page 8-40)

Duplex (page 8-40)

Copies (page 8-40)

Orientation (page 8-40)

Form Feed Timeout (page 8-40)

LF Action (page 8-40)

CR Action (page 8-40)

Job Name (page 8-40)

User Name (page 8-40)

Paper Feed Mode (page 8-40)

MP Tray Priority (page 8-41)

Auto Cassette Change (page 8-41)

Wide A4 (page 8-41)

Resolution (page 8-41)

KIR (page 8-41)

Printing Job Terminator (page 8-41)

Report Print Report Status Page (page 8-42)

Font List (page 8-42)

Network Status (page 8-42)

Service Status (page 8-42)

Optional Network Status (page 8-43)

Data Sanitization Report (page 8-43)

Admin Report

Settings

Outgoing FAX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Incoming FAX Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Result Report

Settings

Send Result Report (page 8-43)

FAX RX Result Report (refer to FAX Operation Guide

Job Finish Notice Setting (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

RX Result Report Type (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

xlii

> Menu Map

Report Sending Log History Auto Sending (page 8-44)

Sending Log History (page 8-44)

Destination (page 8-44)

Job Log Subject (page 8-44)

SSFC Log Subject (page 8-44)

Personal Information (page 8-44)

Settings

Auto Sending (page 8-44)

Destination (page 8-44)

Subject (page 8-44)

Log Reset (page 8-44)

Device Log History

Settings

Device Log History (page 8-45)

Auto Sending (page 8-45)

Destination (page 8-45)

Subject (page 8-45)

Secure Comm. Error

Log

Secure Comm. Error Log (page 8-46)

Auto Sending (page 8-46)

Destination (page 8-46)

Subject (page 8-46)

System/Network Network Host Name (page 8-47)

Wired Network

Settings

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-47)

LAN Interface (page 8-49)

Wi-Fi Direct Settings Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-49)

Device Name (page 8-49)

IP Address (page 8-49)

Auto Disconnect (page 8-49)

Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-50)

Setup (page 8-50)

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-52)

Bonjour (page 8-54)

IPSec (page 8-54)

xliii

> Menu Map

System/Network Network Protocol Settings SMTP (E-mail TX) (page 8-54)

POP3 (E-mail RX) (page 8-54)

FTP Client (Transmission)

(page 8-54)

FTP Server (Reception)

(page 8-54)

SMB Client (Transmission)

(page 8-54)

NetBEUI (page 8-54)

WSD Scan (page 8-55)

WSD Print (page 8-55)

i-FAX (page 8-55)

DSM Scan (page 8-55)

ThinPrint (page 8-55)

LPD (page 8-55)

Raw (page 8-56)

IPP (page 8-56)

IPP over SSL (page 8-56)

HTTP (page 8-56)

HTTPS (page 8-56)

LDAP (page 8-56)

SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-57)

SNMPv3 (page 8-57)

Enhanced WSD (page 8-57)

Enhanced WSD over SSL

(page 8-57)

eSCL (page 8-57)

eSCL over SSL (page 8-57)

VNC (RFB) (page 8-58)

VNC (RFB) over SSL (page 8-58)

Enhanced VNC over SSL

(page 8-58)

Security Settings (page 8-58)

Proxy (page 8-59)

Ping (page 8-59)

Restart Network (page 8-59)

xliv

> Menu Map

System/Network Optional Network Basic (page 8-60)

Wireless Network (page 8-61)

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

Security Level (page 8-63)

Interface Block

Setting

USB Host (page 8-64)

USB Device (page 8-64)

USB Storage (page 8-64)

Optional Interface 1 (page 8-64)

Optional Interface 2 (page 8-64)

Data Security Hard Disk Initialization (page 8-65)

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization (page 8-65)

SSD Initialization (page 8-65)

Data Sanitization (page 8-66)

Software Verification (page 8-66)

Optional Function (page 8-67)

Bluetooth Settings (page 8-67)

Restart Entire Device (page 8-67)

NFC (page 8-68)

Remote Operation (page 8-68)

Edit Destination Address Book (page 3-23)

One Touch Key (page 3-30)

Print List (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Address Book

Defaults

Sort (page 8-69)

Narrow Down (page 8-69)

Address Book Type (page 8-69)

Edit Restriction Address Book (page 8-69)

One-Touch Key (page 8-69)

xlv

> Menu Map

User Login/Job Accounting User Login Setting User Login (page 9-3)

Authentication

Security

User Account Lockout Set.

(page 9-5)

Password Policy Settings

(page 9-7)

Local User List (page 9-8)

Local Authorization (page 9-18)

Group Authorization

Set.

Group Authorization (page 9-19)

Group List (page 9-20)

Guest Authorization

Set.

Guest Authorization (page 9-22)

Guest Property (page 9-23)

Obtain NW User Property (page 9-25)

Simple Login

Settings

Simple Login (page 9-27)

Simple Login Key (page 9-28)

ID Card Settings Keyboard Login (page 9-30)

Additional Authentication

(page 9-30)

PIN Code Authorization (page 9-31)

Job Accounting

Setting

Job Accounting (page 9-34)

Job Accounting Access (page 9-35)

Job Accounting

(Local)

Print Accounting Report

(page 9-48)

Total Job Accounting (page 9-47)

Each Job Accounting (page 9-47)

Accounting List (page 9-36)

Default Setting (page 9-44)

Apply Limit (page 9-50)

Copy/Printer Count (page 9-51)

Unknown User Setting (page 9-52)

User Property (page 9-11)

xlvi

> Menu Map

Date/Timer/Energy Saver Date/Time (page 8-70)

Date Format (page 8-70)

Time Zone (page 8-70)

Auto Panel Reset (page 8-70)

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Low Power Timer (page 8-71)

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-71)

Sleep Timer (page 8-71)

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-71)

Error Job Skip (page 8-71)

Error Clear Timer (page 8-71)

Unusable Time (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-71)

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-72)

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-72)

Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-72)

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-73)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-73)

Ping Timeout (page 8-73)

xlvii

> Menu Map

Adjustment/Maintenance Density Adjustment Copy (page 8-74)

Send/Box (page 8-74)

FAX (refer to FAX Operation Guide)

Background Density

Adj.

Copy (Auto) (page 8-74)

Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-74)

Sharpness

Adjustment

Copy (page 8-74)

Send/Box (page 8-74)

Correcting Black Lines (page 8-74)

System Initialization (page 8-74)

Display Brightness (page 8-75)

Silent Mode (page 8-75)

Auto Color Correction (page 8-75)

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 8-75)

Drum Refresh 1 (page 8-75)

Drum Refresh 2 (page 8-75)

Memory Diagnostics (page 8-75)

Contrast Copy (page 8-75)

Send/Box (page 8-75)

Auto Drum Refresh (page 8-76)

Print Density (page 8-76)

Internet (page 8-76)

Application (page 8-76)

1-1

1 Legal and Safety

Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology ............................................................................................................................. 1-8

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-8

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-9

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................. 1-10

EN ISO 7779 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-10

EK1-ITB 2000 ........................................................................................................................................ 1-10

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ....................................................................................................... 1-10

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) .............................................................. 1-10

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) .............................................................................................. 1-11

Legal Information ................................................................................................................................... 1-12

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-18

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-18

Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-18

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-18

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-18

1-2

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this

machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

1-3

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that

the room be properly ventilated.

Temperature 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

Humidity 10 to 80%

1-4

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes

and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner

container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature

and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-5

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.

1-6

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

The position of the rating label is show below.

3. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

4. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

XXXXi

1-7

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of

Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

Compliance and Conformity

Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type TASKalfa 3212i and

TASKalfa 4012i are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all

persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.

Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B

* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.

NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.

Module name, Option Software Ver. Frequency band in which the

radio equipment operates:

Maximum radio-frequency power

transmitted in the frequency band in

which the radio equipment operates:

IB-51 (option) 2.2.6 2.4GHz 100mW

IB-35 (option) 2014.12 2.4GHz 100mW

Transmitter Module(SRD) 2005.11 13.56MHz 0.2nW

1-8

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to

authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

Other precautions

(for users in California, the United States)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

1-9

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Warranty (the United States and Canada)

3212i/4012i

MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Multifunctional Product (referred to

as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any

defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 600,000 copies/prints from date of

installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective

within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall

be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish labor.

This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new

KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.

In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the

Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is

not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of

the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at

www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or

www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to

operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,

(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have

been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA

Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.

This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,

which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is

authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.

THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF

THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

1-10

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do

not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

• Paper money

• Bank note

• Securities

•Stamp

• Passport

• Certificate

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

EN ISO 7779

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder

weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe

aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)

Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,

which offers the advantage that a LAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be

transmitted.

On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can

pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.

Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the

following communication contents.

• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers

• Contents of email messages

1-11

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Illegal Intrusion

A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the

following illegal actions.

• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)

• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information

(spoofing)

• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)

• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)

Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to

reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when

the product is used.

We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and

that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the

security settings.

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical

institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and

precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire

alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the

instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.

• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles

or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy

including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please

use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and

redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in

applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,

nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in

these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.

Sólo México (Mexico only)

Este equipo utiliza el módulo de interfaz de red inalámbrica modelo LBWA1ZZ1CA para conectarse a las redes

Inalámbricas.

1-12

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document

Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE is registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• TASKalfa is registered trademarks or trademarks of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Excel and PowerPoint are registered

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.

• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered

trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United States, Japan and

other countries.

• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by

Apple Inc.

• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.

• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

• RealVNC, VNC and RFB are registered trademarks of RealVNC Ltd. in the U.S. and in other countries.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The

designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

1-13

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

GPL/LGPL

This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)

software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it

under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.

OpenSSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without

prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so

as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The

following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the

SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the

package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1-14

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must

include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.

this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

1-15

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

Knopflerfish License

This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.

http://www.knopflerfish.org

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Apache License (Version 2.0)

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are

under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or

indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of

fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source

code, documentation source, and configuration files.

1-16

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including

but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as

indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix

below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the

Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an

original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain

separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or

additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work

by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For

the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the

Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code

control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of

discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise

designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been

received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to

You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,

prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such

Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a

perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent

license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license

applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their

Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was

submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)

alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent

infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date

such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with

or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,

and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of

the Derivative Works; and

(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute

must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices

that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text

file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the

Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices

normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the

License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an

addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be

construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license

terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as

a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated

in this License.

1-17

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for

inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any

additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any

separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product

names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and

reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and

each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible

for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your

exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or

otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,

shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential

damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including

but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other

commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose

to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights

consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on

Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold

each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your

accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets

"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the

appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of

purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party

archives.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the

License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS

IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for

the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

1-18

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of

time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state

but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of

time.

Low Power Mode (page 2-39)

Sleep (page 2-39)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 2-41)

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

Duplex (page 6-44)

Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex

mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that

machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.

Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper

certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or

an equivalent quality standard, be used.

This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to

further saving of forest resources.

* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"

Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that

automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.

Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a

significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation

time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this

product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the

use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing

ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during

product use and cut energy-related costs.

2-1

2 Installing and Setting

up the Machine

This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and

software installation.

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached) ....................................................... 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..... 2-6

Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-8

Power On/Off ................................................ 2-9

Power On ............................................ 2-9

Power Off ............................................ 2-9

Using the Operation Panel .......................... 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ....................... 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . 2-11

Assigning Functions to Function

Keys .................................................. 2-12

Touch Panel ................................................ 2-14

Home Screen .................................... 2-14

Display for Device Information .......... 2-18

Display Setting Screen ..................... 2-18

Functions Key ................................... 2-19

Using the Screen .............................. 2-19

Display of Keys That Cannot Be

Set .................................................... 2-20

Original Preview ................................ 2-20

Entering Numbers ............................. 2-23

Using the Enter Key .......................... 2-24

Using the Quick No. Search Key ...... 2-24

Help Screen ...................................... 2-25

Accessibility Functions (Magnifying

the View) ........................................... 2-26

Logout ............................................... 2-28

Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-29

Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-29

Network Setup ............................................ 2-30

Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-30

Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-32

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-36

Configuring NFC ............................... 2-38

Energy Saver Function ............................... 2-39

Low Power Mode .............................. 2-39

Sleep ................................................. 2-39

Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-40

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-40

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models

except for Europe) ............................ 2-40

Energy Saver Recovery Level .......... 2-40

Weekly Timer Settings ...................... 2-40

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) 2-41

Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-42

Installing Software ....................................... 2-45

Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-45

Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-46

Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-52

Installing Software in Mac

Computer .......................................... 2-53

Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-55

Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-57

Checking the Counter ................................. 2-58

Additional Preparations for the

Administrator ............................................... 2-59

Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-59

Strengthening the Security ................ 2-59

Command Center RX .................................. 2-61

Accessing Command Center RX ...... 2-62

Changing Security Settings .............. 2-63

Changing Device Information ........... 2-64

E-mail Settings .................................. 2-65

Registering Destinations ................... 2-69

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-70

Printing a document stored in a Custom

Box .................................................... 2-71

Transferring Data from Our Other

Products ...................................................... 2-73

Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-73

2-2

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

Part Names (Machine Exterior)

1 Document Processor

2 Original Loaded Indicator

3 Original Width Guides

4 Cleaning Cloth Compartment

5 Original Table

6 Original Eject Table

7 Original Stopper

8 USB Memory Slot

9 Slit Glass

10 Original Size Indicator Plates

11 Platen

12 Operation Panel

13 Front Cover

14 Cassette 1

15 Cassette 2

16 Power Switch

17 Handles

18 Right Cover 2 Lever

19 Right Cover 2

20 Main Power Switch

21 Paper Stopper

22 Inner Tray

23 Job Separator Tray

3 8 11 12

14 15 17 20 22 17

45 6 9 107

181916 232117

2-3

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

24 Paper Width Adjusting Tab

25 Paper Width Guide

26 Paper Length Guide

27 Right Cover 1 Lever

28 Right Cover 1

29 Paper Width Guide

30 Multipurpose Tray

31 Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray

27 282624

2-4

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

1 USB Interface Connector

2 USB Port

3 Network Interface Connector

4 Option Interface Slot

5 Toner Container

6 Waste Toner Box

7 Spare Waste Toner Box Tray (W1)

2-5

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)

1 Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray)

2 Tray A

3 Tray B

4 Job Separator Tray

5 Finisher Tray

Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

6 Cassette 3

7 Cassette 4

8 Control Section of the Finisher

Manual Staple (page 5-70)

9 Original Cover

2-6

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.

When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct

Cables that Can Be Used

NOTE

If you are using the machine with the optional wireless interface kit attached, you do not need to connect the LAN

cable. To use a wireless LAN, it is necessary to change the default settings for the machine using the System Menu.

Optional Network (page 8-60)

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1

*1 Function available when using optional FAX kit. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX

Operation Guide.

LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,

1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the

machine.

Printer USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB

compliant, Max. 5.0 m, shielded)

IMPORTANT

Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.

USB

MFP

Network

Network cable

connection

Wi-Fi

connection*1

Wi-Fi Direct

connection*1

*1 Only for models with

Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi connection or

Wi-Fi Direct connection

Tablet

Wi-Fi access point

2-7

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub or the PC.

2Power on the machine and configure the network.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.

Power Off (page 2-9)

Network Setup (page 2-30)

2-8

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the left side of the body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

2Power on the machine.

Connecting the Power Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the power to the machine is turned off.

Power Off (page 2-9)

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-9

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

1Turn the power switch on.

Power Off

1Turn the power switch off.

The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

It takes about 3 minutes for power off.

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the

machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the

outlet as a safety precaution.

IMPORTANT

If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch

disables fax transmission and reception. Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage

bag to protect it from humidity.

2-10

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys

1[Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2[Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.

3 Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be registered.

4[Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.

5[Accessibility Display] key: Switches the touch panel display on the Copy screen and the Send screen to a

magnified view.

6[Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

7[System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.

8[Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.

9[Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.

10 [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.

11 [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.

12 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).

13 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.

14 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.

15 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory (general

purpose item).

16 [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.

17 Touch Panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.

Assigning Functions to Function Keys (page 2-12)

134

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

16 15 14172

2-11

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted.

2-12

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Assigning Functions to Function Keys

Function keys are keys to which various functions and applications, including copy and scan, can be assigned.

Frequently used functions and applications can be assigned and the screen can easily be displayed.

For this machine, the following functions are pre-assigned; however, alternative functions can be registered by

re-assigning these functions.

•[F1] (Function key 1): Copy

•[F2] (Function key 2): Send

•[F3] (Function key 3): FAX (Option)

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Change] to enable the function key to be set.

2Select the function to be assigned.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Function Description Reference page

None No function has been assigned. —

Copy Displays the Copy screen. page 5-17

Send Displays the Send screen. page 5-21

FAX*1 Displays the FAX screen. Refer to the FAX

Operation

Guide.

Custom Box Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-52

Job Box Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-12

Removable Memory Displays the Removable Memory screen. page 5-64

FAX Box*1 Displays the FAX Box screen. Refer to the FAX

Operation

Guide.

Send to Me (E-mail)*2 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail

address of the logged-in user is set as the

destination.

page 5-38

Send to Me from Box

(E-mail)*2

Displays the Custom Box screen. The E-

mail address of the logged-in user is set as

the destination.

page 5-58

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

2-13

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser screen. page 5-68

Program Calls up the registered program. The icon

will change according to the function of the

program.

page 5-9

Application Name Displays the selected applications. page 5-12

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Function Description Reference page

2-14

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Touch Panel

Home Screen

This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the

corresponding screen.

You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option

settings.

No. Item Description

1Message Displays the message depending on the status.

2Desktop Displays function icons including the functions registered in

program. Icons that are not displayed on the first page will

appear by changing the page.

3Screen-switching

keys

Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.

NOTE

You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving

the finger sideways (i.e. swiping).

4Taskbar Displays task icons.

5[Logout] Logs out the current user. This is displayed when user login

administration is enabled.

Status

Logout

Copy Send Custom Box

Job Box Removable

Memory

Select the function.

Admin

FAX

Internet Browser

FAX Box

mm0101_01

ProgramSystem

Paper

Settings

Status/

Job Cancel

Device

Information

Language HelpWi-Fi Direct

12/12/2017 14:00

Status

Logout

Select the function.

Admin

Custom Box

FAX

Internet BrowserFAX Box

Copy Send

Job Box Removable

Memory

mm0101_02

ProgramSystem

Paper

Settings

Status/

Job Cancel

Device

Information

Language HelpWi-Fi Direct

122

2-15

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Editing the Home Screen

You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]

2Configure the settings.

The available settings are shown below.

6Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when

user login administration is enabled. Selecting "Login User

Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.

7Status Icon (Wi-Fi) The icon is displayed when Wi-Fi is connected. When Wi-Fi is

not connected, " " is displayed.

8Status Icon (Error) The icon is displayed during network startup or error.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in

with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are

set as shown below.

Item Description

Customize

Desktop

Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1

Select [Add] to display the screen for selecting the function to

display. Select the function to display and [OK].

Select an icon and [Previous] or [After] to change the display

position of the selected icon on the Desktop.

To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select

[Delete].

*1 Displays a maximum of 58 function icons including the installed applications and the

functions that can be used when options are installed.

Customize

Taskbar

Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar.*2

*2 8 task icons can be displayed.

Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.

Value: Images 1 to 8

No. Item Description

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

2-16

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Desktop

Function Icon Description Reference page

Copy*1

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

Displays the Copy screen. page 5-17

Send*1 Displays the Send screen. page 5-21

FAX*2

*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

Displays the FAX screen. Refer to the FAX

Operation

Guide.

Custom Box*1 Displays the Custom Box

screen.

page 5-52

Job Box*1 Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-12

Removable

Memory*1

Displays the Removable Memory

screen.

page 5-64

FAX Box*2 Displays the FAX Box screen. Refer to the FAX

Operation

Guide.

Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser

screen.

page 5-68

Send to Me (E-

mail)*3

*3 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Displays the Send screen. The

E-mail address of the logged-in

user is set as the destination.

page 5-38

Send to Me from

Box (E-mail)*3

Displays the Custom Box

screen. The E-mail address of

the logged-in user is set as the

destination.

page 5-58

Program Calls up the registered program.

The icon will change according

to the function of the program.

page 5-9

Application Name*4

*4 The icon of the application appears.

Displays the selected

applications.

page 5-12

2-17

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Taskbar

Function Icon Description Reference

page

Status/Job Cancel*1

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

/ Displays the Status screen. If an

error occurs, the icon will show "!".

Once the error clears, the display

will return to normal.

―

Device

Information*1

Displays the Device Information

screen. Check the system and

network information.

You can also check information on

the options that are used.

page 2-18

Language*1 Displays the Language setting

screen in System Menu.

page 8-10

Paper Setting*1 Displays the Paper setting screen in

System Menu.

page 8-7

Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of

information relating to the machine

that can use the network appears.

page 8-49

System Menu*1 Displays the System Menu screen. page 8-2

Help*1 Displays the Help screen. page 2-25

Program*1 Displays the program list screen. page 5-9

Accessibility/

Standard

/ Magnifies the text and icons on the

screen. Pressing the Accessibility

icon switches the icon to the

Standard icon. Press the Standard

icon to return to the previous view.

page 2-26

Message Board Displays the Message Board

screen.

NOTE

To use this function, set "Message

Board" to [ON] in System Menu.

Command Center RX User

Guide

page 8-30

2-18

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display for Device Information

Shows device information. Allows you to check system and network information, as well as options that are used.

1[Home] key > [Device Information]

2Check the device information.

Display Setting Screen

The following procedure is an example of the Copy screen.

Tab Description

Identification/Wired

Network

You can check ID information such as the model name,

serial number, host name and location, and the IP

address of the wired network.

Wi-Fi*1

*1 Displayed only when the Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer

or our sales or service representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

You can check ID information such as the model name,

serial number, host name and location, and the IP

address of the wireless network.

FAX*2

*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

You can check the local fax number, local fax name,

local fax ID and other fax information.

Software Ver./Capability You can check the software version and performance.

Option You can check information on the options that are used.

1 Shows an image of the output

paper.

2 Original : Shows the original size

when the original is

placed.

Zoom : Shows the

magnification of the

document to be printed.

Paper : Shows the size of the

output paper.

3 Displays the Quick Setup screen.

4 Set the copy functions.

5 Remaining amount of toner.

6 Displays the time.

7 Displays registered shortcuts.

8 Displays the output tray.

9 Displays the paper source.

10 Displays the original position.

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Status

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

2016/02/02 10:10

c010101_01-3bar

Proof Copy

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

3456

2-19

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Functions Key

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

Using the Screen

Touch panel keys that are pressed are outlined in red.

Original

Size

Paper

Selection

Mixed Size

Originals

Original

Orientation

Collate/

Offset

Staple

/Punch

Paper Output

Status

Quick Setup Advanced

Setup

Program

100%

A4Original

Zoom

:Paper

Preview

Image Quality

Org./Paper/

Finishing Layout/Edit

c0102

Preview Proof Copy

Copies

Function key

Tab

Select [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

System Menu

Status

1/2

m01010101

Quick Setup Wizard

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Home

Send

FAX

Report

Common Settings

Copy

Document Box/Removable Memory

Printer

Counter

2-20

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set

Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-

selectable state.

Original Preview

You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Copy] key

2Place the originals.

Normal Grayed out Hidden

In the following cases, the key is

grayed out and cannot be selected.

• Cannot be used in combination

with a feature that is already

selected.

• Use prohibited by user control.

•[Preview] has been selected.

• For functions that cannot be

changed when using proof copy.

Cannot be used because an option

is not installed.

NOTE

If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select

the [Reset] key and try again.

If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the

function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.

NOTE

• To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to the following:

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details (page 5-51)

• The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.

Staple

/Punch

Off

Combine

Staple

/Punch

Off

Combine

Staple

/Punch

Off

Combine

2-21

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

3Display a preview image.

1Select [Preview].

The machine starts scanning the original. When scanning is completed, the preview image

appears on the panel.

2Select [Detail].

You can check the finished image in greater detail.

1 In magnified view, you can

move the range of display.

2 Zoom out.

3Zoom in.

4 In multiple-page documents,

you can change pages by

entering the desired page

number.

5 In multiple-page documents,

you can use these buttons to

change pages.

6 Close the Preview screen.

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_01

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Cancel

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Detail

c010101_03

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

Press Start key to start printing.

Press [Cancel] to change settings.

Preview:

No.

1/6

2015101010574501

Status

Size

Density

: Normal 0

100%

c0301

123

2-22

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Duplex Printing

Settings for duplex printing appear.

3If there is no problem with the preview image, press the [Start] key.

Copying starts.

Using the Preview Screen

When the Preview screen is displayed, you can do the following by moving the finger that is touching the touch panel.

NOTE

• To change the quality or the layout, select [Cancel] or the [Stop] key.

Change the settings and select [

Preview

] again to see a preview image with the new

settings.

• Depending on the function you are using, even if you scan a multi-page original, only

the first page can be previewed.

Function Description

Drag With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move the position of the

displayed preview.

Pinch in

Pinch out

With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the space between the two

fingers to zoom in and out on the view.

Preview:

No.

1/6

2015101010574501

Status

Size

Density

: Normal 0

100%

C0301_02

Side : Front Page

Binding : Left/Right

Image

2-23

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Entering Numbers

When entering numbers, numeric keys appear on the touch panel if you select the [Numeric Keypad] key on the

operation panel or select the area in which the number is entered.

Example: When entering the number of copies

Example: When entering a one-touch key number

1 Enter numbers and symbols.

2 Clear entered numbers.

3 Quick No. Search key.

Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-24)

4 Entry by numeric keys is confirmed.

Using the Enter Key (page 2-24)

5 Close the numeric keypad.

NOTE

• Numeric keys do not appear on the touch panel if an optional numeric keypad is installed.

• Alphabetic letters appear on numeric keys if an optional FAX Kit is installed. Alphabetic letters are used to

remember the FAX number.

234

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_01

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_01

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

abcd@efg.com

Status

Destination Detail Address

Book

Folder Path

Entry

E-mail

Addr Entry

1/100

AAA BBB

FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

0001

0006 0007 0008 0009 0010

1/1

i-FAX

Addr Entry

FAX No.

Entry

WSD Scan

/DSM Scan

Enter Destination.

Destination

DirectOn Hook

A OFFICE

B OFFICE

C OFFICE

Org./Sending

Data Format

Quick SetupDestination Color/

Image Quality

Advanced

Setup

Program

Enter One Touch key number

using # keys.

s0101_03

Cancel OK

(0001 - 1000)

0011

Status

Destination Detail Address

Book

Folder Path

Entry

E-mail

Addr Entry

No.

1/100

AAA BBB CCC DDD

FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

00040003 00050001 0002

0006 0007 0008 0009 0010

1/1

i-FAX

Addr Entry

FAX No.

Entry

WSD Scan

/DSM Scan

Destination

EEE

Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook

Org./Sending

Data Format

Quick SetupDestination Color/

Image Quality

Advanced

Setup

Program

Enter Destination.

s0101_05

abcd@efg.com

A OFFICE

B OFFICE

C OFFICE Member: 3

10.181.56.22:65535

2-24

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Example: When searching for an address number

Using the Enter Key

The Enter key has the same function as the key with the Enter mark (

), such as the [OK  ] key and the [Close  ].

Using the Quick No. Search Key

The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel. Use the Quick No.

Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. For example, you can

specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number.

For more information on speed dialing, refer to the following:

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

NOTE

• Moving your finger while touching the top of the numeric keypad enables you to freely move to any key. (Drag

operation)

• For copy and print screens, you can set numeric keys to be displayed in advance. In addition, you can select the

layout for numeric keys that are used on the application.

Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-31)

Status

Address Book

Cancel OK

Group

E-mail

Dest.

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

No. Type Name Detail

Folder

Detail

Address Book SortAddr Book

0001

0002

0005

0004

0003

ABCD abcd@efg.com

TUVW tuvw@xyz.com

Group1

Group2

Group3

Name

1/2

i-FAXFAX

ABC DEF JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZGHI 0-9

Add/Edit

Address Book

s02010101

Member: 3

Member: 2

Member: 4

Status

Address Book

Cancel OK

Group

E-mail

Dest.

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

No. Type Name Detail

Folder

Detail

Address Book SortAddr Book

0001

0002

0005

0004

0003

ABCD

Enter four digits of address number

using # keys.

TUVW

Group1

Group2

Group3

Name

1/2

i-FAXFAX

ABC DEF JKL Cancel

GHI OK

Add/Edit

Address Book

s02010101_02

(0001 - 2500)

1234

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_01

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

abcd@efg.com

Status

Destination Detail Address

Book

Folder Path

Entry

E-mail

Addr Entry

1/100

AAA BBB

FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

0001

0006 0007 0008 0009 0010

1/1

i-FAX

Addr Entry

FAX No.

Entry

WSD Scan

/DSM Scan

Enter Destination.

Destination

DirectOn Hook

A OFFICE

B OFFICE

C OFFICE

Org./Sending

Data Format

Quick SetupDestination Color/

Image Quality

Advanced

Setup

Program

Enter One Touch key number

using # keys.

s0101_03

Cancel OK

(0001 - 1000)

0011

2-25

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.

To show the Help screen for a function, select [Help] on the panel of the setting screen of that function. The Help screen

shows explanations of functions and how to use them.

1Display the Paper Selection screen.

2Select [Help] on the panel.

Selecting [Help] on the Home Screen

Show the Help list.

Paper Selection (page 6-19)

1 Help titles.

2 Displays information about functions and

machine operation.

3 Show the screen of the tab that includes the

function explained in Help. (In the case of this

screen, the screen that appears after step 1 of

"Setting Procedure" is performed will appear.)

4 Displays the Help list.

5 Closes the Help screen and returns to the

original screen.

6 Scrolls up and down when the help text cannot

be displayed in its entirety on a single screen.

Status

Cancel OK

Paper Selection

Add Shortcut

Paper Set.

Auto

MP Tray

100%

A4Original

Zoom

Paper

c020102

Copies

Plain

Cassette

Preview Proof Copy

Select paper source by choosing a

Cassette or MP Tray.

Selecting Paper Source

1/2

End

Status

Setting Procedure

1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].

2. Press [Paper Selection].

Other Help

h0201020201_02

Try It

Select paper source by choosing a

Cassette or MP Tray.

Selecting Paper Source

1/2

End

Status

Setting Procedure

1. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing].

2. Press [Paper Selection].

Other Help

h0201020201_01

2-26

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Accessibility Functions (Magnifying the View)

You can magnify the text and keys displayed on the touch panel. You can also select items and move to the next screen

using the numeric keys.

While using the Copy or Send functions, select the [Accessibility Display] key.

Large keys and text appear on the touch panel.

You can also control the screen using the numeric key corresponding to the number in circle. (Example: Press the [2]

key on the numeric key pad to zoom.)

Control the functions according to the display on the screen.

NOTE

• This function can be used on the Home screen and on the functions that were registered via Copy/Send Quick

Setup.

• To configure any functions that are not displayed on the Accessibility screen, you need to return to the original view.

Select the [Accessibility Display] key again.

Status

Copies

uc0102

2-27

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter

your login user name and login password.

Normal login

1Enter the login user name and login password to login.

1If this screen is displayed during operations, select [Login User Name] to enter the login

user name.

2[Login Password] > Enter the login password > [OK]

2Select [Login].

NOTE

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

•[# Keys] can be selected to enter the number with the numeric keys on the operation

panel.

•If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method,

authentication destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be

selected as the authentication destination.

• To authenticate by ID card, select [ID Card Login].

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

User Name

Status

Password

abcdef

********

# Keys

Cancel

# Keys

lg0301

2-28

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

Simple Login

If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.

Logout

To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user

name/login password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine enters the sleep state.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

NOTE

If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.

Simple Login Settings (page 9-27)

Status

Select the user to login.

01 No.

Keyboard

1/2

04 05 06

07 08 09

10 11 12

lg0601

2-29

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Default Settings of the Machine

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings

as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

2Configure the settings.

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]

NOTE

For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:

Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)

NOTE

• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:

Date/Timer/Energy Saver (page 8-70)

• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed

location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer

time, configure settings for summer time.

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.

If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be

displayed on the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),

Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is

displayed in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

2-30

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Network Setup

Configuring the Wired Network

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),

TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.

Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-7)

For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network (page 8-47)

IPv4 setting

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wired Network

Settings" [Next] > "TCP/IP Setting" [Next] > "IPv4" [Change]

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel

on This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the

network in a wizard-style screen, without setting

individually in System menu.

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-

42)

Configuring Connections

on the Web Page

For the equipped network interface, the connection

can be set by using Command Center RX. For the

optional IB-50, the connection can be set by using

the dedicated Web page.

Command Center RX User

Guide

IB-50 Operation Guide

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-50

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You

can use it on Windows.

IB-50 Operation Guide

NOTE

When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 or IB-51), select the desired setting on "Primary

Network (Client)".

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

2-31

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

2Configure the settings.

When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].

When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].

[IP Address]: Enter the address.

[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).

[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.

[Auto-IP]: Set to [Off].

When using the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the

machine OFF and then ON.

Restart Network (page 8-59)

NOTE

Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you

configure this setting.

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.

• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"

• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.

Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-32

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring the Wireless Network

When the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 and IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection settings are

configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods

are as follows:

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device

with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-

Fi Direct).

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel

on This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the

network in a wizard-style screen, without setting

individually in System menu.

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-

42)

Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure

the network in details from System menu.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-50)

Wireless Network (page 8-61)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is the tool included in the Product Library. You

can configure the connection according to the

instructions provided by the wizard.

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

(page 2-32)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-51

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You

can use it on both Windows and Mac OS.

IB-51 Operation Guide

Configuring Connections

on the Web Page

For the IB-35, the connection can be set from the

Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User

Guide

For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the

dedicated Web page.

IB-51 Operation Guide

NOTE

• The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models and the Wireless Network Interface Kit

(IB-51) is a standard option. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

• When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 or IB-51), select the desired setting on "Primary

Network (Client)".

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

NOTE

• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi

Direct.

• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from

the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.

• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the

machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.

• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-50)

Wireless Network (page 8-61)

2-33

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable

1Connect the machine with a computer

1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.

2Turn on the computer.

IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.

2Insert the DVD.

3Display the screen.

4Select [Maintenance].

5[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-34

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

5Insert the DVD.

NOTE

• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search

the machine.

• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or

[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to

search the machine.

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-36)

2-35

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Display the screen.

7Select [Maintenance].

8[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

9Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or

host name to search the machine.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-36

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Setting Wi-Fi Direct

Setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.

If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

NOTE

To use Wi-Fi Direct, Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) must be installed in the machine.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

2-37

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

4[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct]

5Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.

6Configure the handheld device.

1[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]

2Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.

3Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the

network using push button.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct]

5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel

simultaneously.

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.

IMPORTANT

You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices

that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-

connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:

• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer

• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel

Select [Home] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Connected Device List] > [Disconnect All]

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu

Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-49)

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

2-38

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring NFC

NFC (Near Field Communication) is the internal standard for near field communication in which the data communication

distance is limited to approximately 10 cm. Establishing data communication simply requires you to show the handheld

device supporting NFC to this machine.

The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring Connections on the Web Page

You can set NFC from the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Configure the NFC from the System Menu.

NFC (page 8-68)

This section presents an example for configuring the NFC from the System Menu.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "NFC" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

2-39

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function

Energy Saver Function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to

reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine

automatically enters Sleep Mode, which minimizes power consumption.

Low Power Mode

If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will

become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.

"Low power." will be displayed on the screen.

The amount of time before entering Low Power Mode: 1 minute (default setting).

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax

data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

• Open the optional original cover or the optional document processor.

• Place originals in the optional document processor.

Recovery time from Low Power Mode is as follows.

• 10 seconds or less

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Sleep

To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save

a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

• Open the optional original cover or the optional document processor.

• Place originals in the optional document processor.

Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.

• TASKalfa 3212i: 12 seconds or less

• TASKalfa 4012i: 15 seconds or less

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

Energy Saver indicator

2-40

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.

The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.

• 1 minute (default setting).

To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether Sleep Mode operates for each function. When the machine enters Sleep Mode, the ID card cannot

be recognized.

For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-71)

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for

Europe)

This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep Mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be set

separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is

asleep. The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be

longer than for normal Sleep Mode.

For more information on Sleep Level (Energy Saver) Mode settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)

Energy Saver Recovery Level

This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.

For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery", "Normal Recovery" or "Power Saving Recovery" can be selected.

The factory default is "Normal Recovery".

For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-72)

Weekly Timer Settings

Set the machine to automatically turn OFF and wake up at times specified for each day.

For more information on Weekly Timer Settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-42)

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep Mode is preceded.

NOTE

If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.

2-41

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function

Power Off Timer (models for Europe)

If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the

time until the power turns off.

The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 3 days

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-73)

2-42

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

Quick Setup Wizard

For FAX functions, paper settings, Energy Saver functions and network settings, the following settings can be configured

in a wizard-style screen.

FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings. This function is displayed when the optional FAX Kit

is installed.

FAX Operation Guide

1. Dialing/RX Mode Dialing Mode (Port 1, Port 2*1)*2

Reception Mode

Auto (DRD)*3

2. Local FAX Information Local FAX Name (Port 1, Port 2*1)

Local FAX Number (Port 1, Port 2*1)

Local FAX ID

TTI

3. Sound FAX Speaker Volume

FAX Monitor Volume

Job Finish Buzzer

4. Rings Rings (Normal)*4

Rings (TAD)*4

Rings (FAX/TEL)*4

5. Output Media Type

Paper Output (Port 1, Port 2*1)*5

Reduced RX Size

6. Redial Retry Times

Power Off Setup Show Power Off Message —

Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode.

1. Sleep Mode For Europe

Sleep Timer

Sleep Rules

Except for Europe

Sleep Timer

Sleep Level

2. Low Power Mode Low Power Timer

3.Recovery Mode Energy Saver Recovery Level

4.Weekly Timer Settings Weekly Timer

Schedule*6

Retry Times*6

Retry Interval*6

2-43

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]

2Select a function.

3Configure the settings.

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.

Network Setup Configures network settings.

1. Network Network Selection*7

Wi-Fi*8

DHCP*9

IP Address*10

Subnet Mask*10

Default Gateway*10

*1 This is displayed when the option of two FAX Kits has been installed.

*2 Inch version only.

*3 DRD reception mode is available for some countries.

*4 This setting does not appear in some regions.

*5 This function is not displayed when the optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher is installed.

*6 This function is displayed when [Weekly Timer] is set to [On].

*7 This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

*8 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].

*9 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].

*10 This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [Off].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:

Help Screen (page 2-25)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

2-44

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

Control Description

End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.

Previous Returns to the previous item.

Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.

Next Advances to the next screen.

Back Returns to the previous screen.

Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.

2-45

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of

this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.

Software on DVD (Windows)

You can use either [

Express Install

] or [

Custom Install

] can be selected for the installation method. [

Express Install

] is

the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [

Express Install

], use [

Custom Install

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-48)

Software Description Express

Install

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are

supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full

advantage of the features of the machine.

Use this driver to create PDF files.

KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification)

format developed by Microsoft Corporation.

―

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-

driver

This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There

are some restrictions on the machine features and option features

that can be used with this driver.

―

FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer

software application as a fax via the machine.

―

Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-

compliant software application.

Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that

enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such

as a scanner and an image processing software application. An

image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application,

which is convenient when a TWAIN-compliant software application is

not installed in the computer.

―

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the

network.

―

Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an

ongoing reporting function.

File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a

specified network folder.

―

KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe

Acrobat/Reader.

―

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be

used in a software application.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

2-46

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Windows

Express Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-48)

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Express Install].

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-47

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Install the software.

You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the

standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)

When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be

displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

5Finish the installation.

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.

Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it

is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

2-48

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

Custom Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Custom Install].

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1 Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2 Click [Accept].

2-49

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Install the software.

1Select the device to be installed.

2Select the driver to be installed.

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port

name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and

that it is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to directly select

the device.

2-50

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.

4Click [Install].

When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be

displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

NOTE

To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

2-51

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)

2-52

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.

Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

2Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.

3Finish uninstalling.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE

Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],

[Kyocera], and [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.

NOTE

• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.

• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to

uninstall the software.

2-53

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Mac Computer

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.

1Insert the DVD.

Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.

2Display the screen.

Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.

3Install the Printer Driver.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.

NOTE

• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

Printer (page 8-39)

• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.

Bonjour (page 8-54)

• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.

2-54

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Configure the printer.

1Open System Preferences and add the printer.

2Select [Default] and then select the driver after clicking on the item that appears in "Name."

3Select the options available for the machine.

4The selected machine is added.

NOTE

When using

an IP

connection,

click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the

host name or IP address.

The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in

"Name". Change if needed.

2-55

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting TWAIN Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.

2Click [Add].

2Configure TWAIN Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

6 Click [OK].

NOTE

When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.

2-56

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Finish registering.

NOTE

Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.

2-57

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting WIA Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.

Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.

3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 Click [OK].

2-58

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]

2Check the counter.

2-59

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Additional Preparations for the

Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and

configure the settings as needed.

Sending Documents to a PC

To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))

To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your

computer.

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-13)

To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

E-mail Settings (page 2-65)

Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with

Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login

user name and password.

In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this

machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2

Authentication Security page 9-5

Auto Panel Reset page 8-70

ID Card Settings*1

*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

page 9-30

Restrict the basic functions that can be

used.

Local Authorization page 9-18

Group Authorization Set. page 9-19

Guest Authorization Set. page 9-22

Prevent another user from handling the

documents stored in the machine.

Custom Box page 5-47

Output the document stored in the

machine at the time when user operates

the device via operation panel.

Remote Printing page 8-30

2-60

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

I want to... Function Reference page

Prevent the data stored in the machine

from being leaked.

Data Overwrite*1

*1 The optional Data Security Kit is required.

Refer to the Data

Security Kit (E)

Operation Guide.

Encryption*1

PDF Encryption Functions page 6-70

Completely delete the data on the machine

before disposing of the machine.

Data Sanitization page 8-66

Record the operation history of users. Login History Settings page 8-44

Device Log History Settings page 8-45

Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-46

Protect the transmission from interception

and wiretapping.

IPP over SSL page 8-56

HTTPS page 8-56

LDAP Security Refer to the Command

Center RX User

Guide.

SMTP Security page 8-54

POP3 Security page 8-54

FTP Encrypted TX page 6-75

Enhanced WSD (SSL) page 8-57

IPSec page 8-54

SNMPv3 page 8-57

Verify the software in the machine. Software Verification page 8-66

2-61

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Command Center RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.

This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.

Command Center RX User Guide

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].

Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,

Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator

privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Setting Description Administ-

rator

General

User

Device

Information

The machine's structure can be checked.

Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing

jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.

Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document

box.

*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.

Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. *1

Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. ―

Function

Settings

Configure the advanced function settings. ―

Network

Settings

Configure the network advanced settings. ―

Security

Settings

Configure the security advanced settings. ―

Management

Settings

Configure the advanced management settings. ―

NOTE

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.

FAX Operation Guide

2-62

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

Examples: https://10.180.81.3/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well

as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.

NOTE

If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,

configure the certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and

Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user

to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation

menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown

below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-63

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Security Settings

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4Click [Security Settings].

2Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.

2-64

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Device Information

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].

NOTE

For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-65

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].

E-mail Settings

By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and

to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, configure the following.

•SMTP settings

Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"

• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails

Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"

• The setting to limit the size of E-mails

Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1Display the screen.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]

menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".

2-66

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Configure the settings.

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".

2-67

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

3Display the screen.

Display the E-mail Settings screen.

From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

4Configure the settings.

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP

Protocol" is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and

set the SMTP protocol to [On].

SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default

port number is 25.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication

Protocol

To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for

authentication.

SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the

[Protocol Settings] page.

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under

the settings without sending a mail.

Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter

the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected.

Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.

2-68

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

5Click [Submit].

POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only

enable the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set

the following items if you want to enable the function of

receiving e-mail on the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Check Interval

Run once now

Domain Restriction

POP3 User Settings

E-mail

Send

Settings

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in

kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an

error message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled.

Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP

server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail

sending regardless of the size limit.

Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-

mails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or

non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the

machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for

SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender

address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will

appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for

further identification of the machine. The maximum length

of the signature is 512 characters.

Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job

Default Settings] page.

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

Setting Description

2-69

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Registering Destinations

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].

5Click [Add].

2Populate the fields.

1Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the

same as when registering via operation panel.

2Click [Submit].

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-23)

2-70

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click [Add].

2Configure the Custom Box.

1Enter the box details.

Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to

populate, refer to the following:

2Click [Submit].

Command Center RX User Guide

2-71

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.

2-72

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Print the document.

1Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.

2Click [Print].

3Configure settings for printing, click [Print].

2-73

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.

This section explains how to transfer data between our products.

Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer on the

included DVD.

For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Backing Up Address Book Data to PC

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Create a backup.

1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and

select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-74

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on

target device], and then click [Next].

2-75

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].

7Click on [Save to file].

8Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].

For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".

NOTE

If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and

then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters

are distinguished (case sensitive)).

2-76

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

9After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.

Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.

Writing Address Book Data to the Machine

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Load the Address Book data.

1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select

[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].

2-77

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

3Select destination device group and click [Next].

4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

5Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target

device], and then click [Next].

Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's

Address Book from entry No.1.

2-78

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

6Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].

7Click [Finish].

The write process of the Address Book data starts.

8Once the write process is complete, click [Close].

3-1

3 Preparation before

Use

This chapter explains the following operations.

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3

Loading in the Cassettes ......................................................................................................................... 3-4

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ..................................................................................................... 3-7

Precautions for Outputting Paper ...................................................................................................................... 3-11

Paper Stopper ......................................................................................................................................... 3-11

Envelope Stack Guide ............................................................................................................................ 3-11

Stack Level Adjuster .............................................................................................................................. 3-12

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-13

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-13

Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-14

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-15

Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-18

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-23

Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-23

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-30

3-2

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Precaution for Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.

• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded

may cause a jam.

• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.

Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the

paper storage bag.

• Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat

from the cassette heater.

• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is

stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to the following:

Paper (page 11-12)

3-3

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.

No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page

1Cassette 1 A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R,

B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K,

16K-R, 16K

Plain, Rough, Vellum,

Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,

Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Thick, High

Quality, Custom 1 to 8

500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-4

2Cassette 2

3Cassette 3

4Cassette 4

5Cassette 3 A4, B5, Letter 1,500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-7

6Cassette 4

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.

• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.

3-4

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Cassettes

The procedures here represent the cassette 1.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

NOTE

When using Ledger size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it

down.

3-5

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Adjust the position of the paper width guides

to the paper size

required

4Align the paper flush against the right side of the cassette.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-6

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

6Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

7Gently push the cassette back in.

8Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 1" [Next]

9Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-7)

NOTE

Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.

Paper Selection (page 6-19)

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-7)

3-7

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder

The procedures here represent the cassette 3.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the cassette size.

1Rotate the Paper Size Guide (A) clamp and remove. Pull the Paper Size Guide (A) up and

out.

2Insert the Paper Size Guide (A) into the slot (bottom of cassette) for the paper size to be

used.

Make sure that the top of the Paper Size Guide (A) matches the paper size to be used,

attach the clamp, and rotate the clamp to lock it.

Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (A) to verify that it is fixed.

1 Paper Size

Guide (A)

2 Clamp

3-8

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way down, press the hook on the side of the

Paper Size Guide (B) to release it and pull out the Paper Size Guide (B).

4Adjust the Paper Size Guide (B) to the paper size.

Insert the Paper Size Guide (B) into the slot marked A4 (on the bottom of the cassette), and

lock the hook (it will make a "click" sound).

Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to verify that it is fixed.

Open the Paper Size Guide (B) as shown, insert into the slot marked B5 (on the bottom of the

cassette), and lock the hook (it will make a "click" sound).

Gently try moving the Paper Size Guide (B) to verify that it is fixed.

1 Paper Size

Guide (B)

3-9

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Letter

The Paper Size Guide (B) is not attached.

With the bottom of the cassette pressed all the way down, press the hook on the side of the

Paper Size Guide (C) to release it and pull out the Paper Size Guide (C).

3Load paper.

1 Paper Size Guide

(C)

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.

3-10

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

4Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

5Gently push the cassette back in.

6Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 3" [Next] > "Media

Type" [Change]

7Configure the function.

Select the paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-7)

3-11

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Precautions for Outputting Paper

Paper Stopper

When using paper A3/Ledger or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.

Envelope Stack Guide

To use an envelope, open the Envelope Stack Guide as shown below.

3-12

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Stack Level Adjuster

If the paper output to the inner tray is significantly curled, you can extend the Stack Level Adjuster as described in the

figure.

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster

Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster

3-13

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your

computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other

versions of Windows.

Making a note of the computer name and full

computer name

Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

1Display the screen.

In Windows 8.1, right-click [PC] in the Start screen and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the

Window icon and select [System].

In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries],

and then select [Properties].

2Check the computer name.

Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:

Computer name: PC001

Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com

After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the

"System Properties" screen.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, right-click [Computer] and select

[Properties].

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System

Properties].

In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [System].

3-14

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Making a note of the user name and domain name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Command Prompt" in the search box. Select [Command

Prompt] in the search list.

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]),

[Accessories] and then [Command Prompt].

In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Command Prompt].

The Command Prompt window appears.

2Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].

Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:

User Name: james.smith

Domain Name: ABCDNET

3-15

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared

Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

1Create a folder.

1Create a folder on your computer.

For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.

NOTE

If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance and

Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel],

[Appearance and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance

and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then

[Folder Options].

Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced

settings".

Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.

3-16

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property], and click [Sharing] and

[Advanced Sharing].

2Configure permission settings.

1Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.

2Make a note of the [Share name].

3Click the [Add] button.

4Specify the location.

3-17

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

5Set the access permission for the user selected.

6Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.

1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page 3-13 is the same as the domain

name:

If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Locations] button,

select the computer name, and click the [OK] button.

Example: PC001

If the computer name that you made a note of on

page 3-13

is not the same as the

domain name:

If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does

not appear in "From this location", click the [Locations] button, select the text after the

dot (.), and click the [OK] button.

Example: abcdnet.com

Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-14)

2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK]

button.

Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a

user.

NOTE

"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen

security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]

checkmark.

1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the

"Change" and "Read" permissions

3 Press [OK].

3-18

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

7Check the details set in the [Security] tab.

Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

1Check file and printer sharing.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then

[Windows Firewall].

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

1 Select the [Security] tab.

2 Select the user you entered.

If the user does not appear on "Group or

user names", click [Edit] button to add user

in a similar way of "configuration of

permission settings".

3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on

[Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and

"Read & execute" permissions.

4 Click the [Close] button.

3-19

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.

2Add a port.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and

[Check firewall status].

2Select [Advanced settings].

3Select [Inbound Rules].

3-20

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

4Select [New Rules].

5Select [Port].

6Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter

"445" then click [Next].

3-21

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

7Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.

8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.

9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].

3-22

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

In Windows 7

1In Windows 7, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and

Security], and then [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

In Windows Vista

1In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],

and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.

3Specify Add a Port settings.

Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.

Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".

4Click [OK] button.

In Windows 10

1In Windows 10, right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control Panel],

[System and Security], and then [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings.

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-18)

3-23

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address

Book

Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.

The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a

group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

Registering a contact address

A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as

destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the

fax function installed).

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit] > [Add] >

[Contact] > [Next]

2Add the name.

1Select "Address Number" [Change].

2Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).

To have the number assigned automatically, enter "0000".

3Select [OK].

The screen shown in step 1 reappears.

NOTE

• Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-69)

• Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators.

Edit Restriction (page 8-69)

NOTE

If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging

in with administrator privileges.

Edit Restriction (page 8-69)

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of

2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.

If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when

you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address

number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.

3-24

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

4Select "Name" [Change].

5Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and

select [OK].

The screen shown in step 1 reappears.

3Add the address.

E-mail Address

"E-mail Address" [Change] > Enter the E-mail address > [OK]

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

3-25

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (SMB) Address

"Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password" [Change] > Enter the

information > [OK]

The table below explains the items to be entered.

To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select "Search Folder from Network" or "Search

Folder by Host Name" [Next].

If you selected "Search Folder from Network" [Next], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",

and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.

If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name"[Next], you can search all PCs on the network

for a destination.

A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you

want to specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login

password entry screen appears.

After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the

shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The

address of the selected shared folder is set.

Select the folder from the Search Results list.

NOTE

For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information

that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,

refer to the following:

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-13)

Item Description Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name*1

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.

"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)

If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.

Computer name Up to

70 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

128 characters

Name*2

*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"

cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user name

needs to be input by using "@."

(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)

If the computer name and domain name are the

same:

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

3-26

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (FTP) Address

"Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password" [Change] > Enter the

information > [OK]

The table below explains the items to be entered.

4Check if the destination entry is correct > [Save]

The destination is added to the Address Book.

To register the registered address in a one-touch key, select [Save] > [Yes]

NOTE

• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

•Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the

connection fails, check the entries you made.

Item Descriptions Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name*1

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.

"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)

If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

70 characters

Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is

combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home

directory.

Up to

128 characters

64 characters

NOTE

• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

•Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the

connection fails, check the entries you made.

NOTE

Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-30)

3-27

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Add the group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a

group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key> [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit] > [Add] >

[Group] > [Next]

2Add the name.

1Select "Address Number" [Change].

2Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2,500).

To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".

3 Select [OK]. The "Add Group" screen reappears.

4Select "Name" [Change].

5Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book > [OK]

The "Add Group" screen reappears.

3Select the members (destinations).

1[Member] > [Add]

2Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group > [OK]

If you have more destinations to add, repeat Step 2.

NOTE

To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed

before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, 100 destinations for the i-FAX,

and a total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.

NOTE

• Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of

2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.

• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears

when you select [Save] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the

address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Checking and Editing Destinations (page 5-43)

3-28

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

4Check if the selected destination was added to the group >

[Save]

The group is added to the Address Book.

To register the registered address in a one-touch key, select [Save] > [Yes]

Editing Address Book Entries

Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit]

2Select a destination or group to edit > [Detail]

2Edit the destination.

Editing a Contact

1Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.

2[Save] > [Yes]

Add a destination to a group

1Change "Name" and "Address Number".

2[Member] > [Add]

3After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]

To delete any destination from the group

1[Member] > Select the delete destination > [Delete] > [Yes]

2After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]

NOTE

Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-30)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-23)

Add the group (page 3-27)

3-29

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Deleting Address Book Entries

Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key> [Edit Destination] > "Address Book" [Add/Edit]

2Select a destination or group to delete.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

Delete the contact or group.

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

3-30

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch

Key)

Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 1,000 destinations can be registered.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "One Touch Key" [Add/Edit]

2Add One Touch Keys.

1Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination > [Add/Edit]

Selecting [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of

a One Touch Key number.

Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.

Select "Display Name" [

Change

3Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen > [OK]

4Select "Destination" [Change].

The Address Book appears.

NOTE

• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-69)

• If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch Keys by

logging in with administrator privileges.

Edit Restriction (page 8-69)

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

For the Quick No. Search key, refer to the following:

Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-24)

NOTE

Up to 24 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Edit Destination - One Touch Key

Add a One Touch key.

Add/Edit

No.

Delete

Detail

1/50

0001 0002 0003 0004 0005

0006 0007 0008 0009 0010

0011 0012 0013 0014 0015

0016 0017 0018 0019 0020

AAA BBB CCC

m034701

3-31

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [

]

Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

6Select [Save].

The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

Editing One Touch Key

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "One Touch Key" [Add/Edit]

2Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) to edit. Selecting [No.] or the Quick No.

Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

2Changing the Registered Information.

1Select [Add/Edit].

2Select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed

information of the selected destination.

3[OK] > [Save] > [Yes]

Add the destination to the One Touch Key.

Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > "One Touch Key" [Add/Edit]

2Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) to edit. Selecting [No.] or the Quick No.

Search key on the numeric keypad enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

2Delete the Registered Information.

Select [Delete] > [Yes]

The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

4-1

4 Printing from PC

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printer Driver Properties Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6

Canceling Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................ 4-9

Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-10

Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-10

Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 4-10

Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 4-10

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 4-10

Printing with NFC .................................................................................................................................... 4-11

Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-12

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-12

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................ 4-13

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ........................................................................ 4-13

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-14

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 4-14

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-15

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 4-15

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-16

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-16

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-17

Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-17

Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-17

Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-18

Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-18

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-18

Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-19

Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-19

Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-20

4-2

Printing from PC >

Printer Driver Properties Screen

The printer driver properties screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.

Printer Driver User Guide

No. Description

1 [Quick Print] tab

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click

an icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

[Basic] tab

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,

destination, and duplex printing.

[Layout] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine

mode, poster printing, and scaling.

[Finishing] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and

stapling.

[Imaging] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.

[Publishing] tab

This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP

film.

[Job] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine.

Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later.

Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient

when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.

[Advanced] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.

4-3

Printing from PC >

Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display

Help as explained below.

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings

(Windows 8.1)

The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when

printing. For the settings, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the

[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.

2 [Profiles]

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's

a convenient practice to save frequently used settings.

3 [Reset]

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of

the screen.

2 Click the item you want to know about.

NOTE

The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.

No. Description

4-4

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing from PC

This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.

Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the

print settings screen of the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

NOTE

• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD

(Product Library).

• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.

• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before

performing the following procedure.

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)

NOTE

Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)

4-5

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.

To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock

or envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu

and select the media type.

4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

4-6

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab

of the print settings screen of the printer driver.

The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.

1Display the screen.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

2Register the paper size.

1Click the [Basic] tab.

2Click the [Page Size...] button.

3Click the [New] button.

4Enter the paper size.

NOTE

To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

Original / Paper Settings (page 8-11)

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

4-7

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

5Enter the name of the paper.

6Click the [Save] button.

7Click the [OK] button.

8Click the [OK] button.

3Display the print settings screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

4-8

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu

and select the media type.

4Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.

5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media

type" menu.

4-9

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog

box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select

[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.

NOTE

When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:

Canceling Jobs (page 5-20)

4-10

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you

can print the job from any handheld device or computer without installing a printer driver.

Printing by AirPrint

AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later

products.

To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print

from a machine connected to the Internet.

The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Mopria

Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products.

Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance.

For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the

wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly

on a peer to peer basis.

The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.

When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by

specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.

When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.

NOTE

A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.

It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be

registered from a PC connected to the same network.

4-11

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing with NFC

When the Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct has been configured in advance, the network between this machine and handheld

device will be configured by simply tapping an NFC tag.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-32)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-36)

4-12

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.

If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box

(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.

Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.

Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-12)

Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.

You can print the documents from the following boxes.

Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-13)

Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-14)

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-15)

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-16)

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job

1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

The Print dialog box displays.

2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.

3Click the [Properties] button.

The Properties dialog box displays.

4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check

box to set the function.

NOTE

For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

4-13

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by

entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon

completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Enter the access code.

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

4Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > Enter the access code

The document is deleted.

2/3

Detail

User:

File

Print Delete

2015/10/10 09:40

2015/10/10 09:45

2015/10/10 09:50

2015/10/10 09:55

2015/10/10 10:00

File Name Date and Time Size

MB21

Status

User 1

b0202

4-14

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as

necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job

Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > [Delete]

2If the document is protected by an access code, enter the code.

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-15

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies

are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be

stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.

• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)

4-16

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can

change the number of copies to print.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

4-17

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)

The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.

Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit manually:

Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit automatically:

The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.

Quick View State

The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.

Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.

NOTE

When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.

• KX DRIVER is installed.

•Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD(SSL)] is enabled.

Network (page 8-47)

1 Printing progress tab

2 Paper tray status tab

3 Toner status tab

4Alert tab

5 Expand button

6 Settings icon

12345 6

4-18

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.

Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.

Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.

Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

1Status icon

2 Job list

4-19

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Alert Tab

If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.

Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.

•Command Center RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the

Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB

connection.

Command Center RX User Guide

•Notification…

This sets the display of the Status Monitor.

Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-20)

•www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Open our website.

•Exit

Exits the Status Monitor.

4-20

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Status Monitor Notification Settings

The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.

Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.

1Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is

executed.

2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.

3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.

When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.

NOTE

The available file format is WAV.

5-1

Operation on the Machine

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Originals .......................................... 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ........... 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document

Processor ............................................ 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ....... 5-6

Program ........................................................ 5-9

Registering Programs ....................... 5-10

Recalling Programs .......................... 5-10

Editing Programs ............................... 5-11

Deleting Programs ............................. 5-11

Application .................................................. 5-12

Installing Applications ....................... 5-12

Activating Applications ...................... 5-13

Deactivating Applications .................. 5-14

Uninstalling Applications ................... 5-14

Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and

Document Box Settings) ............................. 5-15

Adding Shortcuts ............................... 5-15

Editing Shortcuts ............................... 5-16

Deleting Shortcuts ............................. 5-16

Copying ....................................................... 5-17

Basic Operation ................................ 5-17

Proof Copy ........................................ 5-19

Interrupt Copy ................................... 5-20

Canceling Jobs ................................. 5-20

Frequently-Used Sending Method .............. 5-21

Sending Document via E-mail ..................... 5-22

Configuring Settings before Sending .. 5-22

Sending Scanned Document via E-

mail ..................................................... 5-22

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer (Scan to PC) ............................... 5-23

Configuring Settings before Sending .. 5-23

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer ....................... 5-23

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP) .................................. 5-26

Configuring Settings before Sending .. 5-26

Sending Document to Folder on an

FTP Server ....................................... 5-26

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................... 5-28

Configuring Settings before Sending 5-28

Scanning Document Using

Application ........................................ 5-28

Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box ... 5-29

Configuring Settings before Sending 5-29

Scanning Document Stored in a Box 5-29

Useful Sending Method ............................... 5-30

WSD Scan .................................................. 5-31

Installing the Driver ........................... 5-31

Executing WSD scan ........................ 5-32

DSM Scan ................................................... 5-34

Configuring Settings before Sending 5-34

Executing DSM Scan ........................ 5-34

Scanning with File Management Utility ....... 5-36

Configuring Settings before Sending 5-36

Using FMU Connection to Scan an

Original ............................................. 5-36

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending) ............................................ 5-37

Send to Me (E-mail) .................................... 5-38

Configuring Settings before Sending ... 5-38

Sending a Document to the Mail

Address of the Logged In User ......... 5-38

Canceling Sending Jobs ............................. 5-39

Handling Destination ................................... 5-40

Specifying Destination ...................... 5-40

Choosing from the Address Book ..... 5-40

Choosing from the One Touch Key ... 5-42

Choosing from the Speed Dial .......... 5-42

Checking and Editing Destinations ... 5-43

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-44

Recall ................................................ 5-45

How to use the FAX Function ..................... 5-46

Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-47

What is Custom Box? ....................... 5-47

What is Job Box? .............................. 5-47

What is Removable Memory Box? .... 5-48

Fax Box ............................................. 5-48

Basic Operation for Document Box .. 5-48

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 5-52

Editing Custom Box .......................... 5-53

Deleting Custom Box ........................ 5-54

Storing Documents to a Custom Box 5-54

Printing Documents in Custom Box .. 5-55

Saving Scanned Documents to a

Custom Box ...................................... 5-56

Sending Documents in Custom Box . 5-57

Sending Documents in Custom Box

to E-mail Address of Logged In User. 5-58

Moving Documents in Custom Box ... 5-58

Copying Documents in Custom Box

into Other Boxes ............................... 5-59

Copying Documents in Custom Box

to Removable Memory ...................... 5-59

Joining Documents in Custom Box ... 5-60

Deleting Documents in Custom Box . 5-61

Job Box ....................................................... 5-62

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs ........... 5-62

Form for Form Overlay ..................... 5-62

Operating using Removable USB Memory . 5-64

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Memory ................. 5-64

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) ................................... 5-66

Check the USB Memory Information 5-67

Removing USB Memory ................... 5-67

Using the Internet Browser ......................... 5-68

Launching and Exiting the Browser .. 5-68

Using the Browser Screen ................ 5-69

Manual Staple ............................................. 5-70

5-2

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals

Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.

• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.

• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

NOTE

• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.

Original Size (page 6-18)

• For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

NOTE

For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-8)

CAUTION

Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original size

indicator plates with the back left corner

as the reference point.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

5-3

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are

scanned.

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the

document processor may become dirty.

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before

loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Curled original

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Carbon paper

• Crumpled paper

IMPORTANT

• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen

glass.

• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.

Detail Document Processor (Automatic 2-Sided) Document Processor

(Dual scan DP)

Type DP-7100 DP-7120 DP-7110

Weight 35 to 160 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)

45 to 160 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)

35 to 220 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 220 g/m2)

Sizes Maximum A3/Ledger

(11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm)

(Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/

297 × 1,900 mm) to Minimum

A6-R/Statement-R

(4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)

Maximum A3/Ledger

(11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm)

(Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/

297 × 1,900 mm) to Minimum

A5-R/Statement-R

(5.51" × 7.16"/140 × 182 mm

Maximum A3/Ledger

(11.69" × 17"/ 297 × 432 mm)

(Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/

297 × 1,900 mm) to Minimum

A6-R/Statement-R

(4.13" × 5.82"/105 × 148 mm)

No. of

sheets

Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled

paper, Vellum paper: 140 sheets

(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)

Thick paper (120 g/m2):

93 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled

paper, Vellum paper: 50 sheets

Thick paper (120 g/m2):

33 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

Plain paper (80 g/m2), Recycled

paper, Vellum paper: 270 sheets

(Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)

Thick paper (120 g/m2):

180 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

IMPORTANT

• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on

the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top

cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.

5-4

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

1Adjust the original width guides.

2Place the originals.

1Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the

leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original loaded indicator

lights when the original is placed correctly.

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

IMPORTANT

• Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,

readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

• Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the

maximum level may cause the originals to jam.

• Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way

that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

5-5

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: B4/Legal or more).

DP-7100/DP-7110

DP-7120

5-6

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-13)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets

• Plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper larger than A4: 25 sheets

• Thick paper (250 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (120 g/m2): 25 sheets

• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 25 sheets

• Hagaki (Cardstock): 20 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:

5 sheets

• OHP film: 10 sheet

1Open the multipurpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the

paper you are using.

• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may

cause a paper jam.

NOTE

• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:

Original / Paper Settings (page 8-11)

• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the

following:

MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)

• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:

Paper Selection (page 6-19)

MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)

5-7

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

2Adjust the multipurpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.

3Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

multipurpose tray.

4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using

the operation panel.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

IMPORTANT

• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.

• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left

over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small

amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first

remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before

loading the paper back into the tray.

• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the clips.

MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)

5-8

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Multipurpose Tray

Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Example: When printing the address.

1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)

2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)

3 Portrait form envelopes (Open the flap)

4 Landscape form envelopes (Close the

flap)

IMPORTANT

• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to

load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE

When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)

1234

5-9

Operation on the Machine > Program

Program

By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as

needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.

The programs below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your

environment.

Program name Description Default Registration

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's

license or an insurance card.

When you scan the front and back of the

card, both sides will be combined and copied

onto a single sheet.

Copying Functions

Combine: [2 in 1]

Continuous Scan: [On]

Original Size: A5/Statement

Paper Selection: Cassette 1

Zoom: Auto Zoom

Eco Copy Use this to save toner consumption when

printing.

This changes color printing to black & white

with lighter density, so that the toner

consumption can be reduced.

Copying Functions

EcoPrint: [On] (Level [5])

Newspaper Copy Use this when you want to copy a newspaper

article, or other originals printed on a colored

substrate.

This adjusts the image quality so that the

color of the substrate or the text on the

reverse side will not show on the copy.

Copying Functions

Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]

Background Density Adj.: [Auto]

Technical Drawing Copy Use this when you want to copy a drawing

that contains shapes drawn with lines, and

graphics. Use this also when you want to

copy colored lines in black & white.

Copying Functions

Original Image: [Text]

Sharpness (All): [+3]

Background Density Adj.: [Auto]

Confidential Stamp Use this to show a translucent text

"Confidential" on the center of the document.

Copying Functions

Prevent Bleed-thru: [On]

Stamp: Confidential

Font Size: middle

Font Color: [Black]

Stamp Position: [Center]

Display Pattern: [Transparent]

NOTE

Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.

If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

5-10

Operation on the Machine > Program

Registering Programs

The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Copy]

2Select the [Program] tab while the copy mode is accessed.

2Register the program.

1[Add] > Select a number (01 to 50) for the program number > [Next]

2Enter the new program name > [Save]

The program is registered.

To display a registered program on the Home screen, select [Yes] on the confirmation

screen that appears, proceed to step 2-3.

3Specify the position in which you want to display the icon of registered program.

4Select [Save].

Recalling Programs

1Recall the program.

1Select [Program] in the Home screen, or the key of the registered program.

Selecting the key of the registered program will recall the program. If you selected

[Program], proceed to step 1-2.

2Select the key for the program number you want to recall.

Select [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad to enter the program

number (01 to 50) directly for recalling.

2Execute the program.

Place the originals > [Start] key

NOTE

If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can

be replaced with a new set of functions.

NOTE

If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the

program might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.

NOTE

[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up the program registered for the

function.

5-11

Operation on the Machine > Program

Editing Programs

You can change program number and program name.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Program]

2Select [Edit].

2Edit the program.

1Select the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to change.

2Select [Edit] to change the program number and program name.

3[Save] > [Yes]

Deleting Programs

1 Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Program]

2Select [Edit].

2Delete the program.

1Select the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to delete.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

Registering Programs (page 5-10)

5-12

Operation on the Machine > Application

Application

The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.

Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are

available.

For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.

Installing Applications

To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Install the application.

1[Add] > [OK]

2Insert the removable memory containing the application to be installed into the USB

Memory Slot.

3Select the application to be installed > [Install]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

NOTE

You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary

according to the type of application.

NOTE

• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

•Select [Print Report] to print an application report.

NOTE

When the message "Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. Are you

sure?" is displayed, select [No].

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

5-13

Operation on the Machine > Application

4Select [Yes].

Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the

installation may take some time.

Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.

Activating Applications

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Activate the application.

1Select the desired application > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

2Enter the license key > [Official]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen

does not appear, go to step 3-3. To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without

entering the license key.

3Select [Yes].

3Select the application icon in the Home screen.

Select the application icon.

The application will start up.

NOTE

• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.

• To remove the removable memory, select [Remove Memory] and wait until the

message "Removable Memory can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the

removable memory.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

IMPORTANT

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you

will no longer be able to use the application.

• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

5-14

Operation on the Machine > Application

Deactivating Applications

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Deactivate the application.

Select the desired application to exit > [Deactivate]

Uninstalling Applications

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Deactivate the application.

1Select the application you want to delete > [Delete]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

2Select [Yes].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Select [x] on the screen if you want to exit the already activated application.

The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

5-15

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Registering Shortcuts

(Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

You can register shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for

the selected function can also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as

necessary.

Adding Shortcuts

Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in

which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.

1In each function, display the configuration screen you want to

2Register the shortcuts.

1Select the setting you want to add.

2Select [Add Shortcut].

3Select the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.

4Enter the shortcut name > [Save].

The shortcut is registered.

NOTE

If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can

be replaced with a new one.

Status

Cancel OK

Memo Page

Add Shortcut

Off

Layout B

Original

Orientation

Layout A

Border Line

Top

R to L

Top

R to B

Top

L to B

Top

L to R

Layout

None

Top Edge

on Top

50%

A4Original

Zoom

Paper

c023003

Preview Proof Copy

Copies

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Memo Page

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_05

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

5-16

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Editing Shortcuts

1In the setup screen of each function, select [Add Shortcut] in

the bottom of the screen.

2Edit the shortcut

1Select [Edit].

2Select the shortcut key you want to edit.

3Select "Shortcut No" [Change] or "Shortcut Name" [Change] > Change the settings >

[OK].

4[Save] > [Yes]

Deleting Shortcuts

1In the setup screen of each function, select [Add Shortcut] in

the bottom of the screen.

2Delete the shortcut

1Select [Edit].

2Select the shortcut key you want to delete > [Delete this Shortcut] > [Yes]

5-17

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Copying

The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.

Basic Operation

1[Home] key > [Copy]

2Place the originals.

1Place the originals.

2Check the preview image.

Check the Original, Zoom, and Paper settings.

3Select the functions.

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

NOTE

Select [Preview] to show a preview image.

Original Preview (page 2-20)

How to Select Functions (page 6-2)

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_01

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

5-18

Operation on the Machine > Copying

4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Select the [Numeric Keypad] key or the area for inputting the number of sheets to display the

numeric keypad. Specify the desired number up to 999.

5Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.

NOTE

This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the

original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the

reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will

appear. Select [Reserve Next] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-32)

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_04

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

Cancel Reserve Next

Status

Scanner Setting

Copies

Printer Setting

Collate

Tray A

Top Edge on Top

100%

Scanned Pages

Job No.: Job Name: User Name: 000021 doc20151010101034 -----

2-sided

Plain

a01c02

Copies

5-19

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Proof Copy

It is possible to copy one sheet before copying a large number of sheets. This enables you to check the contents and

finishing and copy the desired number of sheets without scanning the original if you are satisfied with the result. If you

want to make changes, you can change the settings and copy only one sheet again.

1Configure the settings.

Place the originals onto the machine, and configure the copy settings.

2Select [Proof Copy].

3Check.

Check contents and finishing.

Modify copy settings according to results. All functions except for functions whose keys are

grayed out on the touch panel can be corrected.

To perform a proof copy again, select [Proof Copy].

4Press the [Start] key.

Remaining sheets are copied.

Image QualityOrg./Paper/

Finishing

Quick Setup Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 6

Shortcut 5

Program

100%

Preview

Original

Zoom

Paper

Preview

Proof Copy

c010101_04

Copies

Staple

/Punch

Normal 0

DensityPaper

Selection

Auto

Zoom

100%

Off1-sided

>>1-sided

Duplex

Off

Combine

5-20

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Interrupt Copy

This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.

When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

1Configure the settings.

1Select the [Interrupt] key.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.

2Press the [Start] key.

Interrupt copying begins.

3When interrupt copying ends, select the [Interrupt] key.

The machine resumes the paused print jobs.

Canceling Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

The copy job is canceled.

When there is a job printing or on standby

Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]

NOTE

• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and

printing resumes.

You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-71)

• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try

the priority override.

Priority Override (page 6-63)

NOTE

Reserve Next Priority

is set to [

Off

], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting the [

Stop

]

key or [

Cancel

] will cancel the printing job in progress.

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-32)

5-21

Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method

Frequently-Used Sending Method

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In

order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is

recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-22)

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-23)

• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-26)

• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-28)

NOTE

• Different sending options can be specified in combination.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-37)

• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.

FAX Operation Guide

5-22

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

Sending Document via E-mail

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.

E-mail Settings (page 2-65)

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

3In the basic screen for sending, select [E-mail Addr Entry].

4Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to

100 E-mail addresses can be specified.

You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [Add Address

Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.

Destinations can be changed later.

5Select the functions.

Press tabs to display other functions.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-44)

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.

Broadcast (page 8-34)

Send (page 6-5)

5-23

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, configure the following settings.

• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name

• Make a note of the user name and domain name

• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder

• Configure the Windows firewall

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

3In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder Path Entry].

4Enter the destination information.

1Select [SMB].

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-13)

Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-14)

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-15)

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-18)

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-24

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

2Select the key of each item > enter the destination data > [OK].

The table below lists the items to be set.

To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select "Search Folder from Network" or "Search

Folder by Host Name" [Next].

If you selected "Search Folder from Network" [Next], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup",

and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.

If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name"[Next], you can search all PCs on the network

for a destination.

Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to

specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login password

entry screen appears.

After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the

shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The

address of the selected shared folder is set.

Select the folder from the Search Results list.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Detail Max.

characters

Host Name *1

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.

"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)

If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.

Computer name Up to

70 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

128 characters

*2 When sending a document through an optional network interface (IB-50 or IB-51), "\"

cannot be used. If the computer name is different from the domain name, login user

name needs to be input by using "@."

(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)

If the computer name and domain name are

the same:

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are

different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

5-25

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

5Check the status.

1Check the information.

Change the delay as required.

2Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If

"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.

You can specify a combine total of up to 10 SMB and FTP destination folders.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to

Address Book].

6Select [OK].

Destinations can be changed later.

7Select the functions.

Select tabs to display other functions.

8Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.

Broadcast (page 8-34)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-44)

Send (page 6-5)

5-26

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

3In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder Path Entry].

4Enter the destination information.

1Select [FTP].

2Select the key of each item > enter the destination data > [OK].

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

5-27

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

The table below lists the items to be set.

5Check the status.

1Check the information.

Change the delay as required.

2Select [Connection Test] to check the connection.

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If

"Cannot connect." appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add Address

Book].

6Select [OK].

Destinations can be changed later.

7Select the functions.

Select tabs to display other functions.

8Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Item Data to be entered Max.

characters

Host Name *1

*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.

"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:21)

If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 21.

Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

70 characters

Path*2

*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is

combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path to the receiving folder

For example: User\ScanData

Otherwise the data will be saved in the home

directory.

Up to

128 characters

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be entered.

Broadcast (page 8-34)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-44)

Send (page 6-5)

5-28

Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)

Setting WIA Driver (page 2-57)

Scanning Document Using Application

This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.

3Place the originals.

4Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-29

Operation on the Machine > Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

Scanning Document stored in a Custom Box

Follow the steps as below for scanning a document stored in a custom box using the TWAIN driver.

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-55)

Scanning Document Stored in a Box

This subsection explains how to scan an original using an application supporting TWAIN.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Display lists of documents.

1Select a custom box stored a document.

If a password has been set for the box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the

password and click the [OK] button. When you select a box, the document files in the

Custom Box appear in "Document List".

2Set how to display the document data. Click the [Setting] button to select each item.

3Click [OK] button.

3Scan the originals.

1Select the document data to be scanned from "Document List".

Enter the document data name in the Search (Name) to find the data having the same

document data name or the document data name with the same beginning.

Click the [Detail] button to display the selected document data. When the document data

includes multiple pages, select the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The

selected pages will be scanned.

2Click the [Acquire] button.

The document data is scanned.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

NOTE

In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from

the Custom Box.

5-30

Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method

Useful Sending Method

You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods.

WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

WSD Scan (page 5-31)

DSM Scan: A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan

process from Active Directory.

DSM Scan (page 5-34)

Scanning with File Management Utility: Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it to

a specified network folder or PC.

Scanning with File Management Utility (page 5-36)

Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,

folders, etc.) in a single operation.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-37)

Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.

Send to Me (E-mail) (page 5-38)

5-31

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

Installing the Driver

For Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012

1Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

For Windows 7

1Display [Network] in the Start menu.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].

NOTE

• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and

"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.

WSD Scan (page 8-55)

• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.

NOTE

When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.

1Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.

2Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and

click [Customize].

3When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box

and click [OK].

5-32

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

2Install the driver.

Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].

During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver

Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the

[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.

For Windows 10

1Right-click [Start] button on the Windows and select [Control

Panel] and then [View devices and printer].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

Executing WSD scan

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

3Display the screen.

Select [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].

If DSM Scan is set to [Off] in the network settings, select [WSD Scan] and go to step 4.

4Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine

1[From Operation Panel] > [Next]

NOTE

If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].

If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

DSM Scan (page 8-55)

5-33

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

2Select the destination computer > [OK]

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.

You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [Detail].

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

4Press the [Start] key.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure from Your Computer

1[From Computer] > [Start]

2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

5-34

Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan

DSM Scan

A scanned document can be automatically saved in any format or sent to any destination by reading a scan process

from Active Directory. This function only supports the computers installed Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server

2012.

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

Configuring Settings before Sending

If you are performing DSM scan, check the items below.

• The machine is connected to an Active Directory on the network that the scan process can reference.

• "DSM Scan", "LDAP" and "HTTP" are set to [On] in Network.

• "SSL" is set to [On] in Network.

•[Network Authentication] is set in.

Executing DSM Scan

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

Security Settings (page 8-58)

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the Active Directory that the scan process can reference is not on the network authentication server, DSM must be

set in Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, select

[Cancel] to display the screen for sending.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-35

Operation on the Machine > DSM Scan

3Display the screen.

Select [WSD Scan/DSM Scan].

If WSD Scan is set to [Off] in the network settings, select [DSM Scan] and go to step 5.

4[DSM Scan] > [Next]

5Select the scan process to be used > [OK].

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.

To check the settings, select [Detail].

6Change the settings and add destinations as needed.

Only E-mail addresses can be added as destinations.

In the send base screen, select [Detail/Edit], [Destination], and then [Address Book] or

[E-mail Addr Entry], and add a destination.

In some scan processes, it may not be possible to change settings or add destinations.

7Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

WSD Scan (page 8-55)

5-36

Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility

Scanning with File Management Utility

"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application.

FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" on

the provided DVD, and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder.

Unlike regular transmission functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the

data format.

Configuring Settings before Sending

The first time you use FMU Connection, you must activate it in System Menu.

Application (page 8-76)

To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the

multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility, refer

to the following.

Installing Software (page 2-45)

Using FMU Connection to Scan an Original

1Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the

computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is

installed.

2Place the original.

3Select [FMU Connection].

FMU Connection starts.

4Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary

information and select [Next].

5When the scan settings screen appears, press each item and

configure the necessary settings.

The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:

File Management Utility User Guide

5-37

Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP), fax numbers and i-FAX. This is

referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in

a single operation.

No. of broadcast items: Up to 500

However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options.

• E-mail: Up to 100

• Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 10 SMB and FTP

• i-FAX: Up to 100

Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or

folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one

time.

NOTE

• If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.

• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be specified.

Broadcast (page 8-34)

5-38

Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)

Send to Me (E-mail)

When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Configuring Settings before Sending

To use this function, configure the followings.

To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

Sending a Document to the Mail Address of the

Logged In User

1Select [Home] key.

2Select [Send to Me (E-mail)].

5-39

Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs

Canceling Sending Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

Job Cancel appears.

When there is a job sending or on standby

Canceling job screen appears.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]

NOTE

Selecting the [

Stop

] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.

5-40

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Handling Destination

This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.

Specifying Destination

Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:

• Choosing from the Address Book

• Choosing from the External Address Book

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

• Choosing from One Touch key

• Choosing from the Speed Dial

• Choosing from the FAX

Choosing from the Address Book

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-23)

1In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book].

2Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations

are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server,

select "Addr Book" [Ext Address Book].

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-40)

Command Center RX User Guide

Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-42)

Choosing from the Speed Dial (page 5-42)

FAX Operation Guide

NOTE

• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.

Default Screen (page 8-33)

• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other

party number using the numeric keypad.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

5-41

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.]

from the "Sort".

Destination Search

Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by

initial letter is also available.

3Accept the destination > [OK]

Destinations can be changed later.

NOTE

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

• If [Prohibit] is set to “Broadcast”, multiple destinations cannot be selected. This also

applies to a group in which multiple destinations are registered.

Broadcast (page 8-34)

Keys used Search type Subjects searched

1Search by name Search by registered name.

2Search by number Search by registered address number.

3Advanced search

by initial letter

Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.

4Advanced search

by destination

Advanced search by type of registered destination

(E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).

(FAX: Only when the optional FAX Kit is installed. i-

FAX: Only when the optional Internet FAX Kit is

activated.)

You can set this function up so that destination types

are selected when the address book is displayed.

For details, refer to the following:

Narrow Down (page 8-69)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-44)

NOTE

• To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and select [Delete].

• You can set the default "Sort" settings.

Sort (page 8-69)

Status

Address Book

Cancel OK

Group

E-mail

Dest.

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

No. Type Name Detail

Folder

Detail

Address Book SortAddr Book

0001

0002

0005

0004

0003

ABCD abcd@efg.com

TUVW tuvw@xyz.com

Group1

Group2

Group3

Name

1/2

i-FAXFAX

ABC DEF JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZGHI 0-9

Add/Edit

Address Book

s02010101

Member: 3

Member: 2

Member: 4

5-42

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Choosing from the One Touch Key

In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.

Choosing from the Speed Dial

Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).

In the basic screen for sending, select [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad and use the numeric

keys to enter the speed dial number in the numeric entry screen.

NOTE

If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or [ ] to scroll and view

next or previous One Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.

For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-30)

NOTE

If you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].

Status

Destination Detail Address

Book

Folder Path

Entry

E-mail

Addr Entry

No.

1/100

AAA BBB CCC DDD

FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

00040003 00050001 0002

0006 0007 0008 0009 0010

1/1

i-FAX

Addr Entry

FAX No.

Entry

WSD Scan

/DSM Scan

Destination

EEE

Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook

Org./Sending

Data Format

Quick SetupDestination Color/

Image Quality

Advanced

Setup

Program

Enter Destination.

s0101_04

Status

Destination Detail Address

Book

Folder Path

Entry

E-mail

Addr Entry

No.

1/100

AAA BBB CCC DDD

FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

00040003 00050001 0002

0006 0007 0008 0009 0010

1/1

i-FAX

Addr Entry

FAX No.

Entry

WSD Scan

/DSM Scan

Destination

EEE

Detail/Edit Delete RecallChainDirectOn Hook

Org./Sending

Data Format

Quick SetupDestination Color/

Image Quality

Advanced

Setup

Program

Enter Destination.

s0101_04

5-43

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Checking and Editing Destinations

1Display the screen.

Specify the destination.

2Check and edit the destination.

Select a destination and select [Detail/Edit] to check it. The entered addresses can be edited

if they have been specified.

Select a destination and select [Delete] to remove the destination from the list.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

NOTE

• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen

appears. Enter the same destination again, and select [OK].

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-33)

• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears

after pressing the [Start] key.

Dest. Check before Send (page 8-33)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-44)

5-44

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing

the [Start] key.

Dest. Check before Send (page 8-33)

1Select [ ] or [ ] to confirm all destination.

Selecting [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]

To add the destination, select [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.

2Select [Check].

NOTE

Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot

select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.

Check

Cancel

Status

Check the destination list through the last page. Destination

Detail

Delete

Destination Detail

A OFFICE 1234567890

02/02/2013 10:10

After checking the list, press [Check] and then Start key.

s0501

1/1

5-45

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Recall

Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to

the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.

1Select [Recall].

The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.

2Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also

displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

NOTE

• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is

displayed when you press the [Start] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-44)

• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.

- When you turn the power off

- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)

- When you log out

5-46

Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function

How to use the FAX Function

On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make

use of FAX functionality.

FAX Operation Guide

5-47

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Using Document Boxes

Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.

The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory Box, and Fax Box.

What is Custom Box?

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You

can create or delete a Custom Box.

The following operations are possible:

• Creating a new Custom Box

• Printing Document in a Custom Box

• Saving scanned documents to a Custom Box

• Sending Documents in a Custom Box

• Editing Documents in a Custom Box

• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box

What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", "Repeat Copy Box",

and "Form for Form Overlay Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

Repeat Copy Box

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies

later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-62)

Form for Form Overlay Box

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the

forms or images for overlaying.

Form for Form Overlay (page 5-62)

NOTE

The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-38)

• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-12)

NOTE

Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.

5-48

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

What is Removable Memory Box?

A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data

directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory

in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, high compression PDF, Word, Excel or PowerPoint format (Scan to USB).

Fax Box

Fax Box store the fax data. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of FAX functionality.

FAX Operation Guide

Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom

boxes.

Box List

NOTE

Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.

NOTE

In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon

privileges, refer to the following:

Editing Custom Box (page 5-53)

1 Listing the boxes by owner in alphabetical order.

2 Listing the boxes by name in alphabetical order.

3 Listing the boxes by number in ascending/

descending order.

4 Saves the document in the selected box.

5 Displays the details for the selected box.

6 Opens the selected box.

7 Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or

deletes box information.

8 A box can be searched for by Box No.

9 A box can be searched for by Box Name.

No. Name Owner Used

Add/Edit Box

1/1

0001 SALES Anonymous

Store File Detail Open

Custom Box

Status

Search(No.)

Search(Name)

Program

63 MB

b0101_01

5-49

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Document List

The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as

thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.

List

Thumbnail

1 Switches between list display and thumbnail

display.

2 Listing the documents by time of update in

ascending/descending order.

3 Listing the documents by name in alphabetical

order.

4 Selecting more than one document at a time.

5 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

6 Previews the selected document.

7 Select a document in the Document List and

select [Detail] to display the details for the

selected document.

8 Select a document in the Document List and

select [Page Selection] to display the selected

document.

9 Listing the documents by size in ascending/

descending order.

1 Selecting more than one document at a time.

2 Highlighting a document to display its details

with [Detail].

3 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

4 Prints, sends, joins, moves, copies or deletes

the selected documents.

5 Saves the document in the open box.

NOTE

You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot

select multiple documents when you are sending documents.

1/1

0001 2015101009404501 2015/10/10 09:40 21

Box:

File Name Date and Time Size

Status

2015101009504511

2015101010004521

2015/10/10 09:50

2015/10/10 10:00

Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File

Detail

Preview

0002

0003

Search(Name)

Page Selection

b020101

Box:

Detail

1/1

201510101057

Join Move/Copy Delete

201510101057

SendPrint Store File

SALES

Preview

Status

Search(Name)

Detail

b020102

0001

5-50

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Viewing Box Details

1Select [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.

2Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and

select [Detail/Edit].

3Check the box details.

4[Cancel] > [Close]

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Editing Box Details

1Select [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.

2Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and

select [Detail/Edit].

3Check the box details.

To edit details, select [Change] of the detail you wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and

select [OK].

4If you have changed the details, select [Save] and then select

[Yes] in the confirmation screen.

If you do not change the details, select [No].

5Select [Close].

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

5-51

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details

1Select (highlight) a document to preview and then select

[Preview] or [Detail].

2Preview the document or check the document details.

The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.

3Confirm the document(s) and select [Close].

Selecting a page

When printing, sending, or copying a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.

Select [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Select Pages to Process] in the Preview

screen, to display the page selection screen.

Select the pages you want to work with, and select [Print], [Send], or [Copy to Memory].

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-55)

Sending Documents in Custom Box (page 5-57)

Moving Documents in Custom Box (page 5-58)

1Zoom in.

2Zoom out.

3 When you have zoomed in, you can use these

keys to move the displayed area.

4 Press to select any page of the open document

and print, send or copy to removable memory.

Selecting a page (page 5-51)

5 In multiple-page documents, you can use these

buttons to change pages.

6 In multiple-page documents, you can change

pages by entering the desired page number.

NOTE

The preview display can be controlled by moving your finger(s) on the touch panel.

Original Preview (page 2-20)

1 Displaying the number of pages selected.

2 Selecting more than one document at a time.

3 Highlighting the selected document.

4 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

5 Selected pages can be printed, sent, or copied

to custom box.

6 You can specify the pages you want to select by

selecting [Enter Pages].

7 You can specify a range of selection by

selecting [Select Range].

Preview:

No.

1/6

2015101010574501

Status

Size

Resol.

Color

: Full Color

300x300dpi

Select Pages to Process

b0703

100%

File:

1/1

Copy to

Memory

Cancel

SendPrint

Selected Pages:

Status

Select Range

Enter Pages

1pages

b020103

1/2 2/2

doc0001820160526224855

5-52

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit Box]

2Register the Custom Box.

1[Add] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]

The table below lists the items to be set.

NOTE

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They

cannot be performed with user privileges.

- Creating a box

- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.

Item Description

Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box

number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique

number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be

automatically assigned.

Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that

appears.

Permission*2 Select whether to share the box.

Box

Password

User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to

protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same

password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm

Password].

This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.

Usage

Restriction

The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction

enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes

by selecting [-], [+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and

30,000 (MB).

Auto File

Deletion

Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.

Select [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the

numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are

stored. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To

disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

5-53

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

2Select [Add].

The Custom Box is created.

Editing Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit Box]

2Edit the custom box.

1Select the box > [Detail/Edit] > Enter the information for each item > [OK] > [Edit]

When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies

depending on the privileges of the logged in user.

Free Space Displays the free space on the box.

Overwrite

Setting

Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when

new documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select

[Permit]. To retain old documents, select [Prohibit].

Delete after

Printed

Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is

complete. To delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document,

select [Off].

*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

Privileges Settings that can be changed

Administrator Box Name

Box No.

Owner

Permission

Box Password

Usage Restriction

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

Item Description

5-54

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

3[Save] > [Close]

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Deleting Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Detail/Edit]

2Delete the custom box.

Select the box > [Delete] > [Yes]

Storing Documents to a Custom Box

Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the

following:

Printer Driver User Guide

User Box Name

Box Password

Permission

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-52)

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

Privileges Settings that can be changed

5-55

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Printing Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document you want to print.

3Select [Open].

2Print the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2Select [Print].

3Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

If a document stored from a computer is selected, the print settings selection screen

appears.

• To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select

[Print As Is]. Select [Start Print] to start printing.

• To change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings] and change the print

settings.

After a document saved in the machine is selected, the [Use File Settings] key may

appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used.

• To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings].

• If you need to change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings].

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected document begins.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-8)

NOTE

Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.

Registering Programs (page 5-10)

Recalling Programs (page 5-10)

5-56

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Place the originals.

3Store the document.

1Select the box > [Store File]

2Select the functions.

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [tabs], other

selectable functions will be shown as a list.

3Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-8)

NOTE

• Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.

• Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.

Registering Programs (page 5-10)

Recalling Programs (page 5-10)

5-57

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Sending Documents in Custom Box

When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-63)

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]

2Send the document.

1Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2Select [Send].

3Set the destination.

For more information on selecting destinations, refer to the following:

4Set the sending size, original image, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

5Press the [Start] key.

Sending of the selected document begins.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

You cannot select and send multiple documents.

To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send) (page 6-8)

NOTE

Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.

Registering Programs (page 5-10)

Recalling Programs (page 5-10)

5-58

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address

of Logged In User.

When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Setting before send

Before using this function, the following are necessary.

• The function icon must be displayed in the home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

Sending to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Send to the E-mail address of the logged in user. The procedure is as follows.

1Select [Home] key.

2Select [Send to Me from BOX (E-mail)].

Moving Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]

2Move the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Move/Copy] > [Move to Custom Box] > [Next] > select the destination of move > [Move/

Copy] > [OK]

The selected document is moved.

NOTE

When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

5-59

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]

2Copy the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Move/Copy] > [Copy to Custom Box] > [Next] > select the destination of copy > [Copy] >

[OK]

The selected document is copied.

Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable

Memory

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]

2Copy the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Move/Copy] > [Copy to Removable Memory] > [Next] > select the destination of copy >

[Next] > [Copy] > [OK]

The selected document is copied.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to copied is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-60

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Joining Documents in Custom Box

You can join documents within a custom box into one file.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]

2Join the document.

1Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

You can join up to 10 documents.

2Select [Join].

3Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.

Highlight the document you want to rearrange and select [Up] or [Down] to move it to the

correct place in the sequence.

4 [Next] > [File Name] > Enter the file name for the joined document > [OK]

5[Join] > [Yes]

The documents are joined.

NOTE

You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be

joined beforehand.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.

NOTE

After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they

are no longer needed.

5-61

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Deleting Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

•[Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-62

Operation on the Machine > Job Box

Job Box

This section explains the Repeat Copy Box and the Form for Form Overlay Box. For Private Print/Stored Job Box and

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-12)

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies

later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted. This

section explains how to print documents saved by the Repeat Copy function.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Repeat Copy] > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired > [Start Print]

Printing begins.

The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the power switch is turned off.

Form for Form Overlay

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image. This Job Box is used to store the

forms or images for overlaying.

Storing a Form

You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the job box. One page can be registered in one form.

1Place the original.

2Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Form for Form Overlay] > [Open]

3Store the forms.

1Select [Store File].

2If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is

scanned.

3Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and stored in the [Form for Form Overlay] box.

Repeat Copy (page 6-64)

5-63

Operation on the Machine > Job Box

Deleting a Form Stored

You can delete the form stored in the job box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Form for Form Overlay] > [Open]

2Delete the forms.

Select the form to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]

The form is deleted.

5-64

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Operating using Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB

memory without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• OpenXPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.

The following file types can be stored:

• PDF file format

• TIFF file format

• JPEG file format

• XPS file format

• OpenXPS file format

• High-compression PDF file format

• Word file format

• Excel file format

• PowerPoint file format

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory

1Plug the USB memory.

1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

NOTE

Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.

NOTE

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.

5-65

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying

files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].

Displays the removable memory screen.

2Print the document.

1Select the folder containing the file to be printed.

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2Select the file to be printed > [Print]

3Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected file begins.

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

NOTE

• 1,000 documents can be displayed.

• To return to a higher level folder, select [Back].

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-14)

NOTE

After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in

the setting screen for the feature to be used.

• To use the settings saved with the document, press [Use File Settings].

• If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.

5-66

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

You can store scanned documents to a removal USB memory.

1Place the originals.

2Plug the USB memory.

1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying

files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.

Displays the Removable Memory screen.

3Store the document.

1Select the folder where the file will be stored > [Open].

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2Select [Store File].

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

4Check the storing image.

NOTE

The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-14)

5-67

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

5Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.

Check the USB Memory Information

1In the removable memory screen, select [Memory Information].

2Once you confirm the information, select [Close].

Removing USB Memory

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Remove Memory]

2Select [Remove Memory].

Select [OK], and remove the USB memory after "Removable Memory can be safely removed."

is displayed.

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

NOTE

USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.

Device/Communication (page 7-13)

5-68

Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser

Using the Internet Browser

If the machine is connected to the network, you can browse the Internet on the touch panel.

Launching and Exiting the Browser

Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Internet Browser]

The Internet browser starts up.

2Use the browser screen to browse web pages.

For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to the following:

3To exit the browser, select [X] (Close) and then select [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.

NOTE

To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser Setting" must be set to [On] in Internet.

Internet (page 8-76)

Using the Browser Screen (page 5-69)

NOTE

You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed.

Browser Environment (page 8-76)

5-69

Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser

Using the Browser Screen

The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.

1Title bar: Displays the page title.

2Text box: Pressing the text box displays a

keyboard that allows you to type text.

3Close: Closes the Internet browser and returns

you to the application list screen.

4Scroll bars: These allow you to scroll the

displayed page up, down, left and right by

selecting [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] or by moving one

of the slide bars with your finger.

5Back/Forward: Displays the previous page or

the next page.

6Reload: Updates the page.

7Home page: Displays your specified home page.

You can set your home page.

Browser Environment (page 8-76).

8Enter URL: Use this to display a desired web

page by entering the URL for that page.

9Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page):

Displays a search menu in which you can select

"Retrieval in page" or an Internet search site.

Search Internet: Use the selected search site to

search with the entered keyword.

Retrieval in page: Search from the entered

keyword in the currently displayed page. You can

continue your search by selecting [SearchUp] or

[SearchDown].

10 Menu: Displays the browser setup menu. You

can use this menu to specify the browser's

display magnification, set the text encoding

scheme and check the server certificate.

11 Loader/Progress bar: Shows the status of page

loading. When the browser is loading a web

page, the loader changes to an animated

display.

12 Security lock icon: Displayed when you are

viewing a protected page.

NOTE

Selecting the [Reset] key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application

list screen without displaying the browser exit.

Enter URL Search Menu

Status

KYOCERA Document Solutions | Solutions

webapl0101

1 2 3

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

5-70

Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple

Manual Staple

You can staple copied paper manually without any print operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the staple

sort mode before starting copying, or when you want to staple originals.

Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling

Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.

1Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.

The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple

mode.

2Set the staple position.

Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position

(Back / Front / 2 Points ).

Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the

lamps light solidly.

NOTE

• This function requires the optional Document Finisher:

3,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-25)

• If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key

LEDs all blink. Add staples.

Replacing Staples (3,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 10-11)

• Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.

Paper size

Paper weight

52 - 90 g/m2 (14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond)

A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 65 sheets

A3, B4, Folio, Ledger 30 sheets

1 Stapling position lamps

2 Stapling position key

3 Stapling key / lamp

123

5-71

Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple

3Load the paper.

Straighten the edges of the paper well and place

the paper front side down in the shutter opening

of the output unit.

If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the front guide (A).

If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the back guide (B).

If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at

two points, place the paper with the center

aligned to the center point between the two side

guides (A and B).

4Staple the paper.

Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.

Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray.

Finishing the manual staple mode

Press the stapling position key several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the paper exit area

closes. It means that manual stapling is finished.

If no operation is performed for approx. 10 seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.

CAUTION

Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.

NOTE

• Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the

stapling position key cannot be used.

• The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the

paper.

CAUTION

Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.

NOTE

The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed.

Manual Staple (page 8-28)

6-1

Using Various Functions

This chapter explains the following topics:

Functions Available on the Machine ............. 6-2

About Functions Available on the

Machine .............................................. 6-2

How to Select Functions ..................... 6-2

Copy ................................................... 6-2

Send ................................................... 6-5

Custom Box (Store File, Printing,

Send) .................................................. 6-8

Removable Memory

(Store File, Printing Documents) ....... 6-14

Functions .................................................... 6-17

Original Size ..................................... 6-18

Paper Selection ................................ 6-19

Mixed Size Originals ......................... 6-20

Original Orientation ........................... 6-23

Collate/Offset .................................... 6-24

Staple/Punch ..................................... 6-25

Paper Output .................................... 6-28

Density .............................................. 6-29

Original Image .................................. 6-29

EcoPrint ............................................ 6-30

Color Selection ................................. 6-30

Sharpness ......................................... 6-31

Contrast ............................................ 6-31

Background Density Adj.

(Background Density Adjustment) .... 6-32

Prevent Bleed-thru ............................ 6-32

Zoom ................................................. 6-33

Combine ........................................... 6-36

Margin/Centering, Margin,

Centering .......................................... 6-38

Border Erase ..................................... 6-39

Booklet .............................................. 6-41

Duplex ............................................... 6-44

Cover ................................................ 6-47

Form Overlay .................................... 6-48

Erase Shadowed Areas .................... 6-49

Page # .............................................. 6-49

Insert Sheets/Chapters ..................... 6-51

Memo Page ...................................... 6-52

Image Repeat ................................... 6-54

Text Stamp ........................................ 6-55

Bates Stamp ..................................... 6-58

Continuous Scan .............................. 6-61

Auto Image Rotation ......................... 6-61

Negative Image ................................. 6-62

Mirror Image ...................................... 6-62

Job Finish Notice .............................. 6-62

File Name Entry ................................ 6-63

Priority Override ................................ 6-63

Repeat Copy ..................................... 6-64

DP Read Action ................................ 6-65

Skip Blank Page ................................ 6-65

2-sided/Book Original, Book Original 6-66

Sending Size ..................................... 6-67

File Format ........................................ 6-68

File Separation .................................. 6-73

Scan Resolution ................................ 6-73

E-mail Subject/Body .......................... 6-74

Send and Print .................................. 6-74

Send and Store ................................. 6-74

FTP Encrypted TX ............................ 6-75

File Size Confirmation ....................... 6-75

Delete after Printed ........................... 6-75

Delete after Transmitted ................... 6-75

Storing Size ....................................... 6-76

Long Original ..................................... 6-76

Encrypted PDF Password ................. 6-77

JPEG/TIFF Print ................................ 6-77

XPS Fit to Page ................................ 6-77

6-2

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine

This machine provides the various functions available.

How to Select Functions

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

Copy

For details on each function, see the table below.

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for

originals, paper,

and finishing such

as collate and

staple.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-18

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-19

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-20

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-23

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-24

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-25

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-28

Original

Size

Paper

Selection

Mixed Size

Originals

Original

Orientation

Collate/

Offset

Staple

/Punch

Paper Output

Status

Quick Setup Advanced

Setup

Program

100%

A4Original

Zoom

:Paper

Preview

Image Quality

Org./Paper/

Finishing Layout/Edit

c0102

Preview Proof Copy

Copies

Tab

Function key

Org./Paper/

Finishing

6-3

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for density

and quality of

copies.

Density Adjust density. page 6-29

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-29

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this

function for test prints or any other occasion

when high quality print is not required.

page 6-30

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-31

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-32

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-32

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-31

Configure the

settings for duplex

printing and stamp.

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-33

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed

page.

page 6-36

Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In

addition, you can set the margin width

and the back page margin.

Centering: Centers the original image on the

paper when copying onto paper

different from the original size.

page 6-38

Border Erase Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-39

Booklet Scan multiple original pages, then print copies so

that they can be folded into a single booklet, with

a cover.

page 6-41

Duplex Produces two-sided copies.

You can also create single-sided copies from two-

sided originals.

page 6-44

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Image Quality

Layout/Edit

6-4

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for duplex

printing and stamp.

Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form

or image.

page 6-48

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor or

original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-49

Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-49

Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-47

Insert

Sheets/Chapters

Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of

the chapter the front page.

page 6-51

Image Repeat Tiles the original image on one sheet of paper. page 6-54

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-55

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-58

Memo Page Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. page 6-52

Configure the

settings for

continuous

scanning, mirror

image copies, and

Skip Blank Page

function.

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-61

Auto Image

Rotation

When original and paper source size are the

same, but their orientation is different, rotate

image 90 degrees when copying.

page 6-61

Negative Image Inverts black and white portions of the image for

printing.

page 6-62

Mirror Image Copies the mirrored image of the original. page 6-62

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-63

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-63

Repeat Copy Enables additional copies in the desired quantity

as necessary after a copy job is completed.

page 6-64

DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select

the scanning operation for the document

processor. This function is displayed when the

document processor is installed.

page 6-65

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-65

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Layout/Edit

Advanced

Setup

6-5

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Tab Function key Description Reference page

Configure the

settings for

original type and

file format.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-18

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-20

2-sided/Book

Original, Book

Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding

based on the original.

page 6-66

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-23

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-67

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-68

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by specified number of pages, and

sends the files.

page 6-73

Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a

document processor. This function requires the

optional document processor.

page 6-76

Original

Size

Mixed Size

Originals

2-sided/Book

Original

Orientation

Sending Size File Format File

Separation

Long

Original

Status

Quick Setup Advanced

Setup

Program

Preview

100%

A4Original

Zoom

:Send

Destination

Sending Image

Color/

Image Quality

Org./Sending

Data Format

Destination

s0103

Function key

Tab

Org./Sending

Data Format

6-6

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for

density, quality

of copies, and

color balance.

Density Adjust density. page 6-29

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-29

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-73

FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the

FAX Operation

Guide.

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-30

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-31

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-32

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-32

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-31

Tab Function key Description Reference page

Color/

Image Quality

6-7

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for

transmission

copy, encrypted

transmission,

and file size

confirmation.

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-33

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

sending onto paper different from the original

size.

page 6-38

Border Erase Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-39

FAX Delayed

Transmission

Set a send time. Refer to the FAX

Operation

Guide.

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-61

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor or

original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-49

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-63

i-FAX

Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a

document by i-FAX.

Refer to the

FAX Operation

Guide.

FAX Direct

Transmission

Sends FAX directly without reading original data

into memory.

Refer to the

FAX Operation

Guide.

FAX Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for

Polling Transmission stored in the polling box.

Refer to the

FAX Operation

Guide.

Send and Print Prints a copy of the document being sent. page 6-74

Send and Store Stores a copy of the document being sent in a

Custom Box.

page 6-74

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-75

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-55

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-58

File Size

Confirmation

Checks the file size before sending/storing the

original.

page 6-75

FAX TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results. Refer to the

FAX Operation

Guide.

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and sends only pages that are not blank.

page 6-65

E-mail

Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a

document.

page 6-74

Tab Function key Description Reference page

Advanced

Setup

6-8

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Custom Box (Store File, Printing, Send)

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings when

storing the

document in the

Custom Box.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-18

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-20

2-sided/Book

Original, Book

Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding

based on the original.

page 6-66

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-23

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-76

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-32

Density Adjust density. page 6-29

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-29

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-73

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-30

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-31

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-32

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-33

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

storing onto paper different from the original size.

page 6-38

Original

Size

Mixed Size

Originals

2-sided/Book

Original

Orientation

Status

Functions Back to List

Preview

100%

A4Original

Zoom

:Store

Free Space

200.0MB

Storing Image

Quick Setup

Scan

Resolution

Color

Selection

Sharpness Background

Density Adj.

Storing Size Prevent

Bleed-thru

Density Original

Image

1/2

b050201

Program

Function key

Tab

Functions

6-9

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings when

storing the

document in the

Custom Box.

Border Erase Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-39

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-61

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-63

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor or

original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-49

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and stores only pages that are not blank.

page 6-65

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-31

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Functions

6-10

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the Custom Box.

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-19

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-24

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-25

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-28

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed

page.

page 6-36

Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In

addition, you can set the margin width

and the back page margin.

Centering: Centers the original image on the

paper when copying onto paper

different from the original size.

page 6-38

Booklet Print document so that it can be folded into a

single booklet, with a cover.

page 6-41

Duplex Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided,

or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided.

page 6-44

Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-47

Form Overlay Prints the original document overlaid with a form

or image.

page 6-48

Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-49

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-63

Delete after

Printed

Automatically deletes a document from the box

once printing is complete.

page 6-75

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-63

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this

function for test prints or any other occasion

when high quality print is not required.

page 6-30

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-33

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-55

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-58

Functions

6-11

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for density

and quality of

copies.

Density Adjust density. page 6-29

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-29

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-31

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-32

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-32

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-31

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Image Quality

6-12

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for file

format and FAX

transmission when

sending from the

Custom Box.

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-67

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-68

FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

sending onto paper different from the original

size.

page 6-38

FAX Delayed

Transmission

Set a send time. Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-63

E-mail

Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a

document.

page 6-74

i-FAX

Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a

document by i-FAX.

Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-75

Delete after

Transmitted

Automatically deletes a document from the box

once transmission is complete.

page 6-75

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-33

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by specified number of pages, and

sends the files.

page 6-73

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-55

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-58

File Size

Confirmation

Checks the file size before sending/storing the

original.

page 6-75

FAX TX Report Print a report of fax transmission results. Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

Functions

6-13

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for density,

quality of copies,

and color balance.

Density Adjust density. page 6-29

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-29

Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-73

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-30

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-31

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-32

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-32

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-31

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Color/

Image Quality

6-14

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for color

selection and

document name

when storing the

document in the

removable memory.

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-18

Mixed Size

Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are

set in the document processor all at once.

page 6-20

2-sided/Book

Original, Book

Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding

based on the original.

page 6-66

Original

Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

page 6-23

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-76

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-

through when scanning thin original.

page 6-32

Density Adjust density. page 6-29

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-29

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-73

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-30

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-31

Background

Density Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such

as newspapers.

page 6-32

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-33

Centering Centers the original image on the paper when

storing onto paper different from the original size.

page 6-38

Border Erase Erases the black border that forms around the

image.

page 6-39

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate

batches and then produce as one job.

page 6-61

Original

Size

Mixed Size

Originals

2-sided/Book

Original

Orientation

Status

Functions Back to List

Free Space

200.0MB

Storing Image

Quick Setup RemoveMemory

Scan

Resolution

Color

Selection

Sharpness Background

Density Adj.

Storing Size Prevent

Bleed-thru

Density Original

Image

1/3

b050401

100%

A4Original

Zoom

:Store

Function key

Tab

Functions

6-15

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for color

selection and

document name

when storing the

document in the

removable memory.

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-63

Erase Shadowed

Areas

When scanning with the document processor or

original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.

page 6-49

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank pages

and stores only pages that are not blank.

page 6-65

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and

dark areas of the image.

page 6-31

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-55

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-58

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level

can also be adjusted.

page 6-68

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original

data page by specified number of pages, and

sends the files.

page 6-73

Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a

document processor. This function requires the

optional document processor.

page 6-76

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Functions

6-16

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Printing Documents

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the removable

memory.

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-19

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-24

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-25

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-28

Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can

set the margin width and the back page margin.

page 6-38

Duplex Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. page 6-44

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is

also available that send a notice when a job is

interrupted.

page 6-62

Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-63

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this

function for test prints or any other occasion

when high quality print is not required.

page 6-30

Text Stamp You can add a text stamp on the documents. page 6-55

Bates Stamp You can add a bates stamp on the documents. page 6-58

Encrypted PDF

Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF

data.

page 6-77

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or

TIFF files.

page 6-77

XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the

selected paper size when printing XPS file.

page 6-77

Functions

6-17

Using Various Functions > Functions

Functions

On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.

Icon Description

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example: Select the [Org./Paper/Finishing] tab in the

Copy screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example: Select the [Org./Sending Data Format] tab in

the Send screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example: Select the [Functions] tab in the Custom Box

screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example: Select the [Functions] tab in the Removable

Memory screen to use the function.

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-18

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Size

Specify the original size to be scanned.

Select [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.

Item Value Description

Standard Sizes

Metric models: Auto, A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R,

B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, B6, Folio,

216×340 mm

Have the size of original detected

automatically, or select from the

standard sizes.

Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, Statement, 11×15",

Oficio II

Standard Sizes

Metric models: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, Statement, 11×15",

Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Select from standard sizes except

Standard Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4,

B5-R, B5, B6-R, B6, Folio, 8K,

16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm

Others Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard),

Custom 1 to 4*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to the following:

Custom Original Size (page 8-11)

Select from postcard or the custom

sized originals.

Size Entry Metric X: 50 to 432 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 297 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Enter the size not included in the

standard sizes 1 and 2.*2

When you have selected [Size Entry],

select [+] or [-] to set the sizes of "X"

(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical). Select

[# Keys] to use the numeric keys for

entry.

*2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:

Measurement (page 8-15)

Inch X: 2.00 to 17.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2.00 to 11.69"

(in 0.01" increments)

NOTE

Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-19

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

To select [MP tray], select [Paper Size] and [Media Type], and specify the paper size and the media type. The available

paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

NOTE

• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-7)

• Cassettes after Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Item Value Description

Paper

Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Metric models: A3*1*2, A4-R*1*2, A4*1*2, A5-R*1*2, A6-R*2,

B4*1*2, B5-R*1*2, B5*1*2, B6-R*2, Folio*1*2,

216×340 mm

*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.

*2 Paper size is automatically detected in the Multipurpose Tray.

Select from the standard size.

Inch models: Ledger*1*2, Letter-R*1*2, Letter*1*2,

Legal*1*2, Statement-R*1*2, Executive,

Oficio II

Standard

Sizes 2

Metric models: Ledger*1*2, Letter-R*1*2, Letter*1*2,

Legal*1*2, Statement-R*1*2, Executive,

Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Select from standard sizes

except Standard Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3*1*2, A4-R*1*2, A4*1*2, A5-R*1*2, A6-R*2,

B4*1*2, B5-R*1*2, B5*1*2, B6-R*2, Folio*1*2,

8K, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm

Others ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,

Hagaki (Cardstock)*2, Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*3

*3 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:

Custom Paper Size (page 8-12)

Select from special standard

sizes and custom sizes.

Size

Entry

Metric X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Enter the size not included in

the standard size.*4

When you have selected

[Size Entry], use [+]/[-] or the

numeric keys to set the sizes

of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"

(vertical). Select [# Keys] to

use the numeric keys for

entry.

*4 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:

Measurement (page 8-15)

Inch X: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Media type Plain (52 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to 105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted*5, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*5, Letterhead*5, Thick (106 to 256 g/m2),

Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8*5

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-20

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once.

This function cannot be used if platen is used. Different Width is not displayed in inch models.

Copying

Metric Models

Inch Models

*5 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

IMPORTANT

When paper size and the media type for MP tray is specified, [Paper Settings] is selected. Note that if [MP

Tray] is pressed at this point, the settings will be canceled.

NOTE

• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.

MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)

• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen

appears. When [Auto] is selected and the same size of paper as the detected original size is not loaded, a paper

confirmation screen appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and press [Continue] to start

copying.

Item Value Description

Off

Mixed Size

Copies

Original Width*1

*1 If the document processor (DP-7120) is used, it is not possible to specify a different width for the original.

Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.

Same Size

Copies

Original Width*1 Same Width, Different Width Select options for the width of set original.

Top Page

Direction

Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left Select the original orientation of the first

page.

Item Value Description

Off

Mixed Size Copies — Originals are detected individually for size

and copied to the same size paper as

originals.

Same Size

Copies

Top Page

Direction

Long Edge Left, Short Edge Left Select the original orientation of the first

page.

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-21

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending

Storing

Supported Combinations of Originals

Same Width

When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.

• B4 and B5

• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Example: B4 and B5

Different Width (Available for metric models only)

The supported combinations of originals are as follows.

• A3, B4, A4, B5

• B4, A4-R, B5

•A4-R, B5-R, Folio

Item Value Description

Mixed Size Originals Off

Same Width Scans and sends multiple sheets of the

same width using the document processor.

Different Width Scans and sends multiple sheets of

different width using the document

processor.

Item Value Description

Off

Mixed Size Originals Same Width Scans and stores multiple sheets of the

same width using the document processor.

Different Width Scans and stores multiple sheets of

different width using the document

processor.

NOTE

When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to

[On] for "Folio".

Folio and A4

Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)

6-22

Using Various Functions > Functions

Example: A3, B4, A4, B5

Selecting How to Copy Originals

Set the paper size (copy size) when printing scanned document. Select whether you wish to create individual copies on

different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.

Mixed Size Copies

Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.

Same Size Copies

Originals are all copied to the same size paper.

NOTE

• If you are using the document processor (DP-7120), originals of different width cannot be loaded together.

• Number of sheet that can be placed in the document processor: up to 30 sheets

• When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original Size" to

[On] for "Folio".

A4-R, B5-R, and Folio

Auto Detect Original Size (page 8-13)

IMPORTANT

When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are

aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this

way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.

NOTE

This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.

* Set the originals of A4 and B5 with vertical orientation.

A4-RB4 B5 A4-RB4 B5

A4-RB4 B5 B4 B4 B4

6-23

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.

Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left] or [Auto].

• Zoom (XY Zoom)

•Duplex

• Margin/Centering

• Border Erase

• Combine

• Memo Page

• Page #

•Booklet

• Stapling/Punch (optional feature)

• 2-sided/Book Original

• Text Stamp

• Bates Stamp

NOTE

If [On] is selected in the setting for Original Orientation in System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation

appears when you select any of the above functions.

Orientation Confirmation (page 8-18)

Item Image

Top Edge on

Top

Top Edge on

Left

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

NOTE

The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.

Orig. Orientation (Copy) (page 8-18)

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Original Original orientation

6-24

Using Various Functions > Functions

Collate/Offset

Offsets the output by page or set.

Item Image Description

Collate Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of

copies as required according to page number.

Offset Without Document Finisher (Option) Printed copies are produced after rotating each set (or

page*1) by 90 degrees.

NOTE

To use offsetting, the same size of paper as the selected

paper tray must be loaded in a different orientation in a

different paper tray.

The paper sizes supported in Offset: A4, B5, Letter and

16K.

*1 If [Off] is selected for "Collate" setting, [Each Page] appears. When [On] is selected, [Each Set] appears.

With Document Finisher (Option) Printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or

after each page*1).

NOTE

• The optional Document Finisher is required.

1,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-24)

3,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-25)

• The paper sizes supported in Offset: A3, A4, B4, B5,

216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Oficio II, 8K and

16K.

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-25

Using Various Functions > Functions

Staple/Punch

Staple

Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.

Original Orientation and Staple Position

NOTE

This function requires the optional Document Finisher.

For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to the following:

1,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-24)

3,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-25)

Item Value Description

Staple Off

Top Left Select the staple position. For details on original

orientation and staple position, refer to the following:

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page

6-27)

Top Right

2 staples Left

2 staples Top

2 staples Right

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge

to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]

to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

Original orientation Paper orientation Top Edge on Left

Paper orientation

Cassette paper load

direction

Cassette paper load

direction

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-26

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Stapling

Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width as shown in the combinations below, the output can be

stapled.

• A3 and A4

• B4 and B5

• Ledger and Letter

• Ledger and Letter-R

• 8K and 16K

Punch

Punches holes in sets of finished documents.

NOTE

One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.

B5-R, 16K-R

NOTE

• Number of sheets that can be stapled: up to 30 sheets.

• When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to the following:

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-20)

NOTE

• This function requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.

• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to the following:

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 11-25)

• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole

punching.

Item Value Description

Punch Off

2 holes Left Select the position of punch holes. For details on original orientation and

position of punch holes, refer to the following:

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page 6-27)

2 holes Top

2 holes Right

3 holes Left

3 holes Top

3 holes Right

4 holes Left

4 holes Top

4 holes Right

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the

originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select

[OK].

A3A4

B4B5 LedgerLetter

B5 LedgerLetter

A3A4

LegalLetter-R

6-27

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position

Image Original orientation

Original Print results Glass platen Document processor

NOTE

The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole

punching.

6-28

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Output

Specify the output tray.

with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher

with optional 3,000-Sheet Finisher

with optional Mailbox

Item Description

Inner tray Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Item Description

Finisher Tray Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document Finisher.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Item Description

Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.

Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Item Description

Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.

Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.

When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is set for the

output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be

used.

NOTE

The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.

Paper Output (page 8-17)

Copy

Org./Paper/

Finishing

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-29

Using Various Functions > Functions

Density

Adjust density.

(Value: [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker))

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

Copying

Item Value Description

Text+Photo*1 *2

*1 "Highlighter" can be selected.

Select to bring out text and markings made with a highlighter pen. Reproduces the color of the highlighter pen to the

extent possible.

*2 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.

Printer Output Best for mixed text and photo documents printed on this machine

originally.

Book/Magazine Best for mixed text and photos printed in a magazine, etc.

Photo Printer Output Best for photos printed on this machine originally.

Book/Magazine Best for photos printed in a magazine, etc.

Photo Paper Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text*1 Off

(Light Text/Fine Line)

Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally printed on

this machine.

(Light Text/Fine Line)

Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.

Graphic/Map*1 Printer Output Best for maps and diagrams printed on this machine originally.

Book/Magazine Best for maps and diagrams printed in a magazine.

Copy

Image Quality

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Image Quality Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

Copy

Image Quality

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Image Quality Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

6-30

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Printing/Storing

EcoPrint

EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not

required.

Color Selection

Select the color mode setting.

Item Description

Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text*1

*1 The setting "for OCR" can be configured. When [Text (OCR)] is selected, scanning produces an image that is

suitable for OCR. This function is only available when Color Selection is set to Black and White.

Color Selection (page 6-30)

Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines. Select [Text], [Text (Fine Line)] or [Text (OCR)].

Item Value Description

Off

On [1] (Low) to [5] (High) Adjust the Toner Save Level.

Item Description

Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and

white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white

documents in Grayscale.

Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and

white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white

documents in Black and White.

Full Color Scans the document in full color.

Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.

Black & White Scans the document in black and white.

Copy

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

6-31

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward

"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns

appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".

When [All] is selected, select [-3] to [3] (Blur - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.

When [Text/Fine Line] is selected, select [0] to [3] (Normal - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.

Contrast

You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.

Item Value Description

All [+1] to [+3] (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.

[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.

*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Text/Fine Line [0] to [3]

(Normal - Sharpen)

Makes letters and lines appear sharper.

Only text and fine lines are emphasized.

Item Description

[+1] to [+4] (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.

[-1] to [-4] (Lower) Creates smoother colors.

Copy

Image Quality

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Image Quality Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

Original More SharpLess Sharp

Copy

Image Quality

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Image Quality Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

Original HigherLower

6-32

Using Various Functions > Functions

Background Density Adj. (Background Density

Adjustment)

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the

density of the ground color.

Prevent Bleed-thru

Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.

Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.

Copy

Image Quality

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Image Quality Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

Copy

Image Quality

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Image Quality Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

6-33

Using Various Functions > Functions

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

Copying

The following zoom options are available.

Standard Zoom

Auto

Adjusts the image to match the paper size.

Standard Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

Zoom Entry

Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.

Use the numeric keys or select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

A3: 141%

A5: 70%

6-34

Using Various Functions > Functions

Item Value Description

Standard Zoom

Metric Auto,

400% Max., 200% A5>>A3,

141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,

127% Folio>>A3,

106% 11x15">>A3,

100%,

90% Folio>>A4,

75% 11x15" >>A4,

70% A3>>A4 A4>>A5,

50%, 25% Min.

25 to 400% (in 1% increments)

Select a preset ratio.

Select [Auto] to use

Auto Zoom.

Select [+] or [-] to

change the displayed

magnification as

desired.

Select [#Keys] to use

the numeric keys for

entry.

Metric

(Asia Pacific)

Auto,

400% Max., 200% A5>>A3,

141% A4>>A3 B5>>B4,

122% A4>>B4 A5>>B5,

115% B4>>A3 B5>>A4,

100%,

86% A3>>B4 A4>>B5,

81% B4>>A4 B5>>A5,

70% A3>>A4 B4>>B5,

50%, 25% Min.

25 to 400% (in 1% increments)

Inch Auto,

400% Max., 200% STMT>>Ledger,

154% STMT>>Legal,

129% Letter>>Ledger,

121% Legal>>Ledger,

100%,

78% Legal>>Letter,

77% Ledger>>Legal,

64% Ledger>>Letter,

50% Ledger>>STMT, 25% Min.

25 to 400% (in 1% increments)

6-35

Using Various Functions > Functions

XY Zoom

Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Magnifications can be set in 1%

increments between 25% and 400%.

Printing/Sending/Storing

Item Value Description

XY Zoom X: 25 to 400%

(in 1% increments)

Y: 25 to 400%

(in 1% increments)

Select vertical and horizontal

magnifications individually.

Select [+] or [-] to change the

displayed magnifications of "X"

(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).

Select [# Keys] to use the numeric

keys for entry.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top

Edge on Left, Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals,

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top

Edge on Left]. Then press [OK].

Item Description

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.

NOTE

• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.

Paper Selection (page 6-19)

Sending Size (page 6-67)

Storing Size (page 6-76)

• Some combinations of original size and paper size or sending size may cause the image to be positioned at the

edge of the paper. To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function.

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering (page 6-38)

6-36

Using Various Functions > Functions

Combine

Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Item Value Description

Off

2 in 1 Layout L to R/T to B, R to L/B to T Select the page layout of scanned

originals.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Select [Border Line] to select the page

boundary line, and select [OK].

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top

Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

4 in 1 Layout Right then Down, Left then Down,

Down then Right, Down then Left

Select the page layout of scanned

originals.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Select [Border Line] to select the page

boundary line, and select [OK].

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top

Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

Copy

Layout/Edit

Custom

Box

Functions

None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark

6-37

Using Various Functions > Functions

Layout image

Item Image

2 in 1 L to R/T to B

R to L/B to T

4 in 1 Right then Down

Left then Down

Down then Right

Down then Left

NOTE

• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216×340 mm, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.

• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

6-38

Using Various Functions > Functions

Margin/Centering, Margin, Centering

Copying/Printing

Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.

Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when copying onto paper different from the original size.

NOTE

The default setting for margin width can be changed.

Margin Default (page 8-19)

Item Value Description

Off

Margin Left/Right Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: -0.75" to +0.75"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the margin width.*1

Select [+] or [-] to enter the margins for

"Left/Right" and "Top/Bottom". Select [# Keys]

to use the numeric keys for entry.

Top/Bottom

Back Page Auto, Manual For duplex copying, select [Back Page] and

select [Auto] or [Manual].

When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate

margin is applied automatically on the rear

page depending on a margin specified for the

front page and a binding orientation.

When [Manual] is set, you can set a different

margin than the front on the back. Set the

margin in the screen that is displayed. The

setting selections are the same as for the

front.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge

on Left, Auto*2

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select

[OK].

Centering*3 Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge

on Left, Auto*2

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction.

Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select

[OK].

Copy

Layout/Edit

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-39

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending/storing size, depending on these

sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the Centering function, the image is placed

with a margin equally created for all edges.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Border Erase

Erases the black border that forms around the image.

The following modes are available.

Border Erase Sheet

Border Erase Book

Individual Border Erase

*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-15)

*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

*3 Not displayed when printing from removable memory.

Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such

as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders

around the edges and in the center of the book.

You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

NOTE

• The default setting for border erase width can be changed.

Border Erase Default (page 8-19)

• The default width for back page can be changed.

Border Erase to Back Page (page 8-19)

Copy

Layout/Edit

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Original Copy

6-40

Using Various Functions > Functions

Item Value Description

Off

Border Erase

Sheet

Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0.00" to 2.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the border erase width.*1

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys

for entry.

*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-15)

Back Page Same as Front Page, Do Not

Erase

For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]

and then select [Same as Front Page] or

[Do Not Erase].

Border Erase

Book

Border Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0.00" to 2.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the border erase width.*1

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys

for entry.

Gutter

Back Page Same as Front Page, Do Not

Erase

For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]

and then select [Same as Front Page] or

[Do Not Erase].

Individual

Border Erase

Top Metric: 0 mm to 50 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0.00 to 2.00"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the border erase width.*1

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys

for entry.

Bottom

Left

Right

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on

Left, Auto*2

*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

Back Page Same as Front Page, Do Not

Erase

For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page]

and then select [Same as Front Page] or

[Do Not Erase].

6-41

Using Various Functions > Functions

Booklet

The Booklet option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A

booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.

You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose

tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)

Binding on the left side

Binding on the right side

Top binding

Type of original Original size Paper size

One-sided original,

Two-sided original

All*1

*1 Except for custom sized originals.

A3, A4-R, A4, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Oficio II and 8K

Book Original A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R

and 8K

The folded copies can be read from left to right.

The folded copies can be read from right to left.

The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Custom

Box

Functions

Original Copy

6-42

Using Various Functions > Functions

Copying

Item Value Description

Off

1-sided >>

Booklet

Finishing Binding Left,

Binding Right,

Binding Top

Select the binding orientation of copies.

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then press [OK].

2-sided >>

Booklet

Original Binding Left/Right,

Binding Top

Select the binding direction of originals.

Finishing Binding Left,

Binding Right,

Binding Top

Select the binding orientation of copies.

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then press [OK].

Book >>

Booklet*2

*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".

Original Binding Left,

Binding Right

Select the binding direction of originals.

Finishing Binding Left,

Binding Right

Select the binding orientation of copies.

Cover Off, Cover Select whether to add the cover. Select

[Cover] to select [Cover], and select [OK].

6-43

Using Various Functions > Functions

Printing

Item Value Description

Off

Booklet Binding Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

NOTE

When placing the original on the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.

6-44

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex

Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided

Two-sided to One-sided

Two-sided to Two-sided

Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd

number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

The following binding options are available.

A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation

when turning the pages.

Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. The

optional document processor is required.

The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional

document processor is required.

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter,

Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Original Copy

ghi

def

abc

ghi

abc

def

ghi

abc

def

Original Copy

6-45

Using Various Functions > Functions

Book to One-sided

Book to Two-sided

Copying

Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding

orientation for original and finished documents.

Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.

The following binding options are available.

Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.

Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.

NOTE

• The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K

• The paper sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K

Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with

facing pages.

NOTE

• The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K

• The paper sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A4-R, A4, B5-R, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K-R and 16K

Item Value Description

1-sided >> 1-sided ―Disables the function.

1-sided >>

2-sided

Finishing Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on

Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

Original Copy

Book to

2-sided

Book to

Book

6-46

Using Various Functions > Functions

When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.

After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.

Printing

Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.

2-sided >>

1-sided

Original Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding orientation of originals.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on

Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

2-sided >>

2-sided

Original Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding direction of originals.

Finishing Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on

Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original

document top edge to scan correct

direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either

[Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

Book >>

1-sided*2

Original Binding Left, Binding Right Select the binding direction of originals.

Book >>

2-sided*2

Original Binding Left, Binding Right Select the binding direction of originals.

Finishing Book>>2-sided, Book>>Book Select the desired Duplex option.

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

*2 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided Left/Right Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the

left or right.

Top Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the

top.

Item Value Description

6-47

Using Various Functions > Functions

Cover

Adds a cover to the finished documents.

You can print the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source

than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose tray.

To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-13)

The printing method can be set for the covers. Specify a print setting for each cover.

Item Value Description

Off

Front Cover Not Print, Front Only, Back

Only*1, Duplex*1

*1 This item appears when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".

Duplex (page 6-44)

Different paper has to be inserted for the

first page of the document.

Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],

[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print

setting of the inserted paper.

Front and Back

Covers

Front Cover Print

Setting

Not Print, Front Only, Back

Only*1, Duplex*1

Different paper has to be inserted for the

first page and last page of the document.

Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],

[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print

setting of the inserted paper.

Back Cover Print

Setting

Not Print, Front Only, Back

Only*1, Duplex*1

Copy

Layout/Edit

Custom

Box

Functions

6-48

Using Various Functions > Functions

Form Overlay

Prints the original document overlaid with a form or image.

Once you scan and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the original. You can also use a form that is already

registered in the Job Box.

Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the optional document processor, the first page

of the originals should be placed on the top.

Item Value Description

Off

Select Stored

Form

Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be

overlaid.

Select [+] or [-] in "Density".

Finishing

Image

Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.

Form on Original Image The form is placed on top of the document.

Original Image on Form The form is placed under the document.

Select Form*1

*1 Form must be previously registered in Job Box.

Form for Form Overlay (page 5-62)

―Select the form to be overlaid from Job

Box.

Select [Select Form] to display the job

boxes that store documents which can be

used as a form. Select the desired form

from the list and select [OK].

Scan New

Form*2

*2 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.

Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be

overlaid.

Select [+] or [-] in "Density".

Finishing

Image

Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.

Form on Original Image The form is placed on top of the document.

Original Image on Form The form is placed under the document.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Custom

Box

Functions

Original CopyForm

Density:

30%

Density:

100%

6-49

Using Various Functions > Functions

Erase Shadowed Areas

When scanning with the document processor or original cover open, erase the extra shaded area.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Page #

Adds page numbers to the finished documents.

The available formats for numbering are [-1-], [P. 1 ] and [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the

place of "n".

Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P. 1 ] or [1/n].

Item Value Description

Off

-1-, P.1,

1/n

Position Top Left, Top Middle,

Top Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle,

Bottom Right, Detail

Select the print position of page number.

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed page number

position using numeric values, and to set the page

number position ([Same as Front Page], [Mirror Front

Page]) when a page number is placed on the back side

of the paper in duplex printing.

1st Page 1 to 10 To start page numbering from a page other than the first

page, select [+] or [-] in "1st Page" to specify the starting

page. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Start # 1 to 999 To start the numbering with a number other than 1,

select [+] or [-] in "Start Number" to specify the starting

number. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for

entry.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Copy

Layout/Edit

Custom

Box

Functions

Original [-1-][P. 1 ][1/n]

6-50

Using Various Functions > Functions

-1-, P.1,

1/n

Count Blank

Page*1

―When a scanned document contains blank pages, add a

check mark if you require blank pages to be numbered.

Remove the check mark to skip blank pages.

Last Page Auto, Manual (-10 to 0) If you do not want page numbering through to the last

page, select [Last Page]. Select [Manual] and select [+]

or [-] to specify the final page to be numbered (a

negative number of pages counting backwards from the

last page), and then select [OK]. Specify the desired

number up to -10. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric

keys for entry.

Font Size Font sizes registered in

"Text (Text Stamp)" are

displayed.

Text (Text Stamp)

(page 8-22)

Set the font size of page number.

Style None, Bold, Italic,

Bold/Italic

Set the font style of page number. Select a font style by

checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of page number.

Color Black, White Set the color of page number.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of the color of page number.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of page number.

Denominator#*2 Auto, Manual (1 to 999) The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be

changed manually. Select [Denominator #] and select

[Manual]. Select [+] or [-] to enter the total number of

pages and select [OK]. Select [# Keys] to use the

numeric keys for entry.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*3

Select the orientation of the original document top edge

to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation]

to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge

on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

*1 Not displayed when printing from the custom box.

*2 This item appears when [1/n] is selected.

*3 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Item Value Description

6-51

Using Various Functions > Functions

Insert Sheets/Chapters

Insert a separator sheet, or make the first page of the chapter the front page when performing duplex printing.

The configured pages are displayed on the list.

Item Value Description

Off

On Add Separator Separator

Sheet

1 to 998 Enter document page numbers where

separators get inserted. Select [+] or [-]

to enter the page number. Select

[#Keys] to use the numeric keys for

entry.

Paper

Source

Cassette 1 to 4,

Multipurpose

tray

Select the source of the paper for the

separator.

Chapter Chapter

Page

2 to 998 Enter the page numbers of the original

document where you want to insert the

chapters. Select [+] or [-] to enter the

page number. Select [# Keys] to use the

numeric keys for entry.

Edit ―Change the configuration of the chapter

page and separator. The method of

operation is the same as that of a new

addition.

Delete ―Delete the page selected in the list.

Sheets Setting Not Print, Front

Only, Back

Only*1, Duplex*1

*1 This item appears when finishing is set to 2-sided in "Duplex".

Duplex (page 6-44)

Select [Not Print], [Front Only], [Back

Only], or [Duplex] for the print setting of

the inserted paper.

Copy

Layout/Edit

6-52

Using Various Functions > Functions

Memo Page

Delivers copies with a space for adding notes.

You can also print two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.

Select [Layout A] or [Layout B] and select the page layout from "Layout".

Layout A

Layout B

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Memo mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter,

Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K

Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,

leaving the other half blank for notes.

Reduces images of two original pages for printing onto half of a page,

leaving the other half blank for notes.

Item Value Description

Off

Layout A Layout Left/Top, Right/Bottom Select how to lay out the pages of scanned

original.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type. Select [Border

Line] to select the page boundary line, and select

[OK].

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

Copy

Layout/Edit

Original Copy

6-53

Using Various Functions > Functions

Layout B Layout Top L to R, Top R to L,

Top L to B, Top R to B

Select how to lay out the pages of scanned

original.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type. Select [Border

Line] to select the page boundary line, and select

[OK].

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document top

edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original

Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals,

either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Then select [OK].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Item Value Description

6-54

Using Various Functions > Functions

Image Repeat

Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.

Zoom Priority

Double Copy

Repeat an image of specified zoom ratio.

Copy two image.

Item Value Description

Off

Zoom Priority 25 to 400% (in 1%

increments)

Set the default screen.

Select [+] or [-] to change the displayed magnification as

desired. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Specify

Repeat

Area

Off

On:

Start

Metric*1

X1: 0 to 431 mm

Y1: 0 to 296 mm

Inch

X1: 0.00 to 16.99"

Y1: 0.00 to 11.68"

*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-15)

To set the area of the original to be repeated, select [On] for

"Specify Repeat Area".

Select [+] or [-] to input the area of the original to be repeated.

Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Y1: Length from top left of

platen to top edge of repeat

area

X1: Length from top left of

platen to left edge of repeat

area

Y2: Height of repeat area

X2: Width of repeat area

On:

Area

Metric

X2: 1 to 432 mm

Y2: 1 to 297 mm

Inch

X2: 0.01 to 17.00"

Y2: 0.01 to 11.69"

Double

Copy ―

Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.

For example, you can double-copy an A5 original onto an A4

sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are

identical to the original.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Original Copy

6-55

Using Various Functions > Functions

Text Stamp

You can add a text stamp on the documents.

Copying/Printing

NOTE

This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.

Printing Jobs (page 8-23)

Item Value Description

Off

On Stamp Keyboard, Template 1 to 8 Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to

be printed, or select a text stamp from the

displayed templates.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear.

For details on registering templates, refer to

the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Stamp Method Each Print Page,

Each Original Page

Select the stamp method.

Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp

method for text stamp.

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,

Detail

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [Position] and select the text stamp

position.

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp

position using numeric values, and to set the

stamp position and angle when a stamp is

placed on the back side of the paper in duplex

printing.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-56

Using Various Functions > Functions

On Font Size Registered font sizes are

displayed. For details on

registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-

22)

Set the font size of text stamp.

Character

Border

Off, Circle, Rectangle,

Underline

Set the character border and underline.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.

Color Black, White Set the color of text stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of text stamp color.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of text stamp.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge

on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Item Value Description

6-57

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

NOTE

This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.

Sending Jobs (page 8-25)

Storing Jobs (page 8-27)

Item Value Description

Off

On Stamp Keyboard, Template 1 to 8 Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to

be printed, or select a text stamp from the

displayed templates.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear.

For details on registering templates, refer to

the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,

Detail

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [

Position

] and select the text stamp

position.

Select [Detail] to set the stamp position using

numeric values, and to set the stamp angle.

Font Size Registered font sizes are

displayed. For details on

registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-

22)

Set the font size of text stamp.

Character

Border

Off, Circle, Rectangle,

Underline

Set the character border and underline.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.

Color Black, Red, Green, Blue,

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White

Set the color of text stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of text stamp color.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of text stamp.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

6-58

Using Various Functions > Functions

Bates Stamp

You can add a bates stamp on the documents.

Copying/Printing

NOTE

This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.

Printing Jobs (page 8-23)

Item Value Description

Off

On Stamp Date, User Name, Serial

Number, Numbering, Text 1,

Text 2

Set the stamp to be printed.

When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select

[Change] below and enter the text string.

If you selected [Date], select [Date Format]

and select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY],

or [YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering

Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed

Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7

digits).

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,

Detail

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [Position] and select the bates stamp

position.

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp

position using numeric values, and to set the

stamp position when a stamp is placed on the

back side of the paper in duplex printing.

Copy

Layout/Edit

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-59

Using Various Functions > Functions

On Font Size Registered font sizes are

displayed. For details on

registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font (Bates Stamp) (page

8-22)

Set the font size of bates stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.

Color Black, White Set the color of the bates stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of bates stamp color.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of the bates stamp.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Item Value Description

6-60

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

NOTE

This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.

Sending Jobs (page 8-26)

Storing Jobs (page 8-27)

Item Value Description

Off

On Stamp Date, User Name, Serial

Number, Numbering, Text 1,

Text 2

Set the stamp to be printed.

When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, press

[Change] below and enter the text string.

If you selected [Date], press [Date Format]

and select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY],

or [YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering

Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed

Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7

digits).

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top

Right, Middle Left, Center,

Middle Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle, Bottom Right,

Detail

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [Position] and select the bates stamp

position.

Select [Detail] to specify the stamp position

using numeric values.

Font Size Registered font sizes are

displayed. For details on

registering font sizes, refer to

the following:

Font (Bates Stamp) (page

8-22)

Set the font size of bates stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.

Color Black, Red, Green, Blue,

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White

Set the color of bates stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of bates stamp color.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of bates stamp.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document

top edge to scan correct direction. Select

[Original Orientation] to choose orientation

of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or

[Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

6-61

Using Various Functions > Functions

Continuous Scan

Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.

Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].

Select [On] to use continuous scanning. To use Job Build, select [Job Build]. You can set the functions that appear on

the screen during scanning.

(Value: [Off] / [On] / [Job Build])

Job Build

When [Job Build] is selected when copying or printing, the binding orientation for finished documents can be selected

from [Binding Left], [Binding Right] or [Binding Top].

The following functions can be selected during scanning.

Auto Image Rotation

Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the

orientations are different.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Next Copy: On Back In duplex copying, prints on the back side if the next page is to be printed on the front

side. Select [Next Copy: On Back] to use this function.

Next Copy: On Front In duplex copying, prints on the front side if the next page is to be printed on the back

side. Select [Next Copy: On Front] to use this function.

Sheet Insertion Inserts a blank paper in the next page. Select [Sheet Insertion] to use this function.

NOTE

• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings.

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) (page 8-19)

• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated.

Auto Image Rotation Action (page 8-32)

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

Copy

Advanced

Setup

6-62

Using Various Functions > Functions

Negative Image

Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Mirror Image

Copies the mirrored image of the original.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Job Finish Notice

Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the

machine to finish.

NOTE

This function is only available for black and white copy mode.

NOTE

PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Command Center RX (page 2-61)

E-mail can be sent to a single destination.

Item Description

Off

Address Book Select the notification destination from the address book.

Detail Information on the selected destination can be viewed.

Address Book Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then select [OK].

Notify when

interrupted

Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.

Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Select [E-mail Address], enter the address (up to 128

characters) and select [OK].

Notify when

interrupted

Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-63

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Name Entry

Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status

using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Select [File Name], enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [OK].

To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. The added information will be

displayed in "Additional Info".

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.

The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

• This function is not available if current job was an override.

• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage. In this

case, try the interrupt copy.

Interrupt Copy (page 5-20)

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-64

Using Various Functions > Functions

Repeat Copy

Enables additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed.

For confidential documents, you can set up a password for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct

password must be entered to perform Repeat Copy.

To register a password, select [# Keys] and enter a 4-digit password.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.

When the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to 0 (zero), this function cannot be

used.

Repeat Copy Job Retention (page 8-38)

You can select Repeat Copy as the default setting.

Repeat Copy (page 8-21)

Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying.

File Name Entry (page 6-63)

Repeat Copy

The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Job Box. Refer to Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs to print out the Repeat Copy

jobs.

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs (page 5-62)

IMPORTANT

• A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the power switch is turned off.

• If you forget the password, Repeat Copy cannot be performed for that document. Make a note of the

password beforehand if necessary.

Copy

Advanced

Setup

6-65

Using Various Functions > Functions

DP Read Action

When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document processor. This function is

displayed when the document processor is installed.

Skip Blank Page

When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are

not blank.

Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.

The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the

document.

Select [Blank Pages + Ruled Lines], [Blank Pages Only] or [Blank Pages + Some Text] in [On].

Item Description

Speed Priority Gives priority to scanning speed.

Quality Priority Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.

NOTE

The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Copy

Advanced

Setup

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-66

Using Various Functions > Functions

2-sided/Book Original, Book Original

Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

Sample image

Item Value Description

1-sided ―"2-sided/Book Original" is not set.

2-sided*1

*1 Available when the optional document processor is used.

Binding Binding

Left/Right,

Binding Top

Select the binding orientation of originals.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left,

Auto*2

*2 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to

choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top]

or [Top Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

Book*3

*3 [Top Edge on Top] is set for "Original Orientation".

Binding Binding Left,

Binding Right

Select the binding orientation of originals.

Value Image

2-sided Binding Left/Right

Binding Top

Book Binding Left

Binding Right

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-67

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending Size

Select size of image to be sent.

Select [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the storing size.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 6-18), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-33) are related to each other. For details, see the table

below.

Item Value Description

Standard Sizes 1 Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5,

A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm

Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,

Letter, Legal, Statement, 11×15",

Oficio II

Select from Same as Original Size or

Standard Size.

Standard Sizes 2 Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement,

11×15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K

Inch models: A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K,

16K, 216×340 mm

Select from standard sizes except

Standard Sizes 1.

Others Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return

postcard)

Select from Hagaki (Cardstock).

Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-18) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-33) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send

the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

6-68

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Format

Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.

Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], [High Comp. PDF], [Word], [Excel], and

[PowerPoint].

When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.

If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.

Item Value Color mode

PDF *1*2*3

*1 You can create Searchable PDF file by running OCR on the scanned document.

OCR Text Recognition (Option) (page 6-69)

*2 Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u]).

*3 Set PDF encryption.

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-70)

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color

(Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale,

Black and White

TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color

(Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale,

Black and White

JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale

XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color

(Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale,

Black and White

OpenXPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color

(Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale,

Black and White

High Comp. PDF *1*2 Compression Ratio Priority,

Standard, Quality Priority

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color

(Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale

Word*4

*4 Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.

Scan to Office Function (page 6-72)

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color,

Grayscale

Excel*4 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color,

Grayscale

PowerPoint*4 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color,

Grayscale

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-69

Using Various Functions > Functions

OCR Text Recognition (Option)

When [

PDF

], [

High Comp. PDF

[Word]

[Excel]

, or

[PowerPoint]

is selected for the file format, you can create

Searchable file by running OCR on the scanned document. Select [

OCR Text Recognition

], and then [

], select the

language of the document, and select [

NOTE

• When [High Comp. PDF] is selected, you cannot adjust the image quality.

• You can use PDF encryption functions.

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-70)

• If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.

Item Description

Off Do not create Searchable file.

On Create Searchable file.

Select the language to extract from the languages that appear on the touch

panel.

Auto Image

Rotation

Rotates image automatically by recognizing text orientation.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

• This function cannot be set when you send from the Custom Box.

• If the proper language is not selected, file creation may take a long time or the creation may fail.

The default language can be changed in System Menu.

Primary OCR Language (page 8-20)

• If you do not set an original in the correct orientation, the text of the document may not be recognized as characters.

In addition, it may take some time to create the file. Check the following:

- The original orientation is correct.

- When setting the originals with the mixed orientation at once, [On] is selected for [Auto Image Rotation].

If you frequently use the originals with the mixed orientation, the default of [Auto Image Rotation] can be

changed in System Menu.

OCR Text Recognition (page 8-20)

• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in

decreasing the recognition accuracy.

- Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)

- Received faxes (with low resolution)

- Originals with the character space too narrow or wide

- Originals with the lines on the text

- Originals with the special fonts

- Binding part of the book

- A handwritten texts

6-70

Using Various Functions > Functions

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Select [Others], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] in [File Format], and select [Encryption].

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].

When [Acrobat 3.0 and later, Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)] is selected

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)

and then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and

select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)

and then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and

select [OK].

When you have entered the password and selected

[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically

limit the operation.

Printing Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.

Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Page Layout except

extracting Pages

Can change the page layout except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Copying of

Text/Images/Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF

file.

6-71

Using Various Functions > Functions

When [Acrobat 5.0 and later, Encryption Level: High(128-bit)] is selected

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)

and then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and

select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters)

and then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and

select [OK].

When you have entered the password and selected

[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically

limit the operation.

Printing Allowed Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed (Low Resolution

only)

Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Inserting/Deleting/Rotating

Pages

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the

PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the

pages of the PDF file.

Copying of

Text/Images/Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF

file.

6-72

Using Various Functions > Functions

Scan to Office Function

This machine provides the function which converts scanned documents including text, figures and pictures into

searchable and editable Microsoft Office (Word, Excel and PowerPoint) 2007 or later data format, via OCR processing.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Send] > [Org./Sending Data Format] > [File Format]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Word], [Excel] or [PowerPoint] as a file format.

2Select [OCR Text Recognition] > [On].

3Select the language of the document which you wish to scan > [OK].

4Select [OCR Output Format] and select an OCR output mode from the table below >

[OK].

3Press the [Start] key.

NOTE

• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

• The scanned result may not be realized perfectly according to condition of the documents.

NOTE

When you select [Off], the documents are converted into the Microsoft Office data (scanned

image).

Item Description

Text + Graphics Converts the scanned documents into the editable and

searchable Microsoft Office data format.

Text + Graphics

w/Scan Image

Converts the scanned documents into two types of data: one is

the editable and searchable Microsoft Office data format and the

other one is the Microsoft Office data format with scanned image.

You can edit text and layout of the editable data by referring the

scanned image.

Scanned Image

w/Srchable Txt

Converts the scanned documents into the searchable Microsoft

Office data format (scanned image).

6-73

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Separation

Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by specified number of pages, and sends the files.

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [600 × 600dpi] / [400 × 400dpi Ultra] / [200 × 400dpi Super] / [300 × 300dpi] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] /

[200 × 100dpi Normal])

NOTE

A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.

Item Value Description

Off

On Set file separation.

Select [+] or [-] to specify the number of pages. Select

[#Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Attach File to E-mail All Files in 1 E-mail,

1 file per E-mail

Select how to attach the files to the E-mail. Select [All

files in 1 E-mail] to attach and send all files in a single

E-mail. Select [1 file per E-mail] to attach and send

1 file per E-mail.

NOTE

The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and

longer send times.

Send

Org./Sending

Data Format

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Send

Color/

Image Quality

Custom

Box

Functions Color/

Image Quality

USB

Memory

Functions

6-74

Using Various Functions > Functions

E-mail Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.

Send and Print

Prints a copy of the document being sent.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Send and Store

Stores a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

• The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.

• Select [Body 1], [Body 2], or [Body 3] to enter stored text for the body text. For details on registering templates,

refer to the following:

E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-20)

NOTE

• When [On] is selected, select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.

If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.

• You can view information on the selected Custom Box by selecting [Detail].

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

Send

Advanced

Setup

Send

Advanced

Setup

Send

Send and Store

6-75

Using Various Functions > Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

File Size Confirmation

Checks the file size before sending the original. To change the file size, change the settings of each function. When you

select [Recalculate], the file size is recalculated.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Delete after Printed

Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Delete after Transmitted

Automatically deletes a document from the box once transmission is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure

Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.

Command Center RX User Guide

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

Send

Advanced

Setup

Custom

Box

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

6-76

Using Various Functions > Functions

Storing Size

Select size of image to be stored.

Select [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the storing size.

Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Long Original

Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor. This function requires the optional document

processor.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Value Description

Standard Sizes 1 Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, A4, A5,

A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm

Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,

Letter, Legal, Statement, 11×15",

Oficio II

Select from Same as Original Size or

Standard Size.

Standard Sizes 2 Metric models: Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement,

11×15", Oficio II, 8K, 16K

Inch models: A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 8K,

16K, 216×340 mm

Select from standard sizes except

Standard Sizes 1.

Others Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return

postcard)

Select from Hagaki (Cardstock).

Original Size and the size you wish to

store as are the same different

Original Size (page 6-18) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Storing Size Select [Same as Original]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-33) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image

as the actual size (No Zoom).

NOTE

• Long originals are sent in black and white.

• Only a single side of a long original can be scanned. Originals of up to 1,900 mm / 74.8"*1 long can be scanned.

• A resolution of 300 × 300 dpi or smaller can be selected.

• This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set.

*1 1,600 mm/63" if fax functions are used.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Send

Advanced

Setup

USB

Memory

Functions

6-77

Using Various Functions > Functions

Encrypted PDF Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

For details on entering the password, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Description

Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.

USB

Memory

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

7-1

7 Status/Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-8

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-9

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ...................................................................................... 7-10

Sending the Log History ........................................................................................................................ 7-10

Job Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................................................. 7-11

Canceling of Jobs ................................................................................................................................... 7-11

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ........................................................................................................... 7-11

Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 7-12

Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-13

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-14

7-2

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing

Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.

The following job statuses are available.

Displaying Status Screens

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job you want to check.

Select either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled

Job] to check the status.

Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy

•Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

• Job Report/List

Send Job Status • FAX transmission

• i-FAX transmission

• E-mail

• Folder transmission

• Application

• Multiple destination

• Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

Store Job Status • Scan

•FAX

•i-FAX

•Printer

• Join Box Document

• Copy Box Document

Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

Print Job Status Screen (page 7-3)

Send Job Status screen (page 7-5)

Store Job Status screen (page 7-6)

Scheduled Job Status Screen (page 7-7)

7-3

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Details of the Status Screens

Print Job Status Screen

NOTE

• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.

Display Status/Log (page 8-29)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3Type Icons that indicate the job type

Copy job

Printer job

Job from Document Box

FAX reception

i-FAX reception

E-mail reception

Data from removable memory

Application

Report/List

4Job Name Job Name or file name

5User Name User Name for the executed job

6Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to print.

Printing: Printing

Waiting: Print Waiting

Pause: Pausing print job or error

Canceling: Canceling the job

7[ ] of "Job Type" Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

doc20151010091015 InProcess

000001

doc20151010091510 Waiting

000002

AAAAA

Pause All

Print Jobs

Cancel Priority

Override

Move Up

Status

Status Log

Job Type All

Job No. Accept Time Type Job Name User Name Status

1/1

Detail

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs

10/10 09:10

10/10 09:15

000003 10/10 09:20 doc20151010092015 WaitingBBBBB

Device/

Communicate

t0101

123 4 65

8910 1211

7-4

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

8[Pause All Print

Jobs]

Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the

printing jobs will be resumed.

9[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this

key.

10 [Priority

Override]

Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs (page 7-11)

11 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job

queue and press this key.

Reordering Print Jobs (page 7-12)

12 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to

display from the list, and press this key.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

You can select [Change] in “Copies” in the detailed

information screen to change the number of copies that are

printed.

NOTE

The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Customize Status Display (page 8-29)

No. Item Description

7-5

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Send Job Status screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3Type Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job FAX

Sending Job i-FAX

Sending Job E-mail

Sending Job Folder

Sending Job Application

Multi Sending

4Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail

address, or server name)

5User Name User Name for the executed job

6Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting sending such as

during scanning originals

Sending: Sending

Waiting: Waiting Sending

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

7[ ] of "Job Type" Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

8[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this

key.

9[Priority

Override]

Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.

Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

10 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to

display from the list, and press this key.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

NOTE

The address and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Customize Status Display (page 8-29)

Log

abc@def.com

438 14:47

1/1

Status

Detail

InProcess

Status

User NameJob NameType

Accept Time

Job No.

Cancel

Job Type All

Status

Scheduled Job

Priority

Override

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs Device/

Communicate

t0201

123 4 5 6

810

7-6

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Job Status screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan

Storing Job Printer

Storing Job FAX

Storing Job i-FAX

Join Box Document

Copy Box Document

4Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

5User Name User Name for the executed job

6Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to save such as

during scanning originals

Storing: Storing Data

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

7[ ] of "Job Type" Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

8[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this

key.

9[Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to

display from the list, and press this key.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

NOTE

The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Customize Status Display (page 8-29)

Status Log

All

Job No. Accept Time Type

doc20150225144758

User Name Status

InProcess438 14:47

Job Name

1/1

Cancel Detail

Job Type

Status

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs Device/

Communicate

t0301

123 4 5 6

7-7

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Scheduled Job Status Screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3Type Icons that indicate the job type

Scheduling Job FAX

4Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of

broadcast items)

5User Name User Name for the executed job

6Start Time Time to start the scheduled job

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this

key.

8[Start Now] Select the job you want to send immediately from the list,

and press this key.

9[Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to

display from the list, and press this key.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-8)

Status Scheduled Job Log

Job No. Accept Time Type Destination User Name Start Time

Cancel Detail

1/1

Status

12:00

0007 9:30 A OFFICE

Start Now

Status

02/02/2013 10:10

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/

Communicate

Paper/

Supplies

t0202

123 4 5 6

78 9

7-8

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs

1Display the screen.

2Check the information.

1Select [Detail] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of information.

In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [Detail] in "Destination" or

"Status/Destination".

"Status/Destination" is displayed when address is selected. Select [Detail] to display the

list. Select [ ] or [ ], select a destination and select [Detail]. Information on the selected

job is displayed for checking.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)

Log

abc@def.com

438 14:47

1/1

Status

Detail

InProcess

Status

User NameJob NameType

Accept Time

Job No.

Cancel

Job Type All

Status

Scheduled Job

Priority

Override

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs Device/

Communicate

t0201

7-9

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.

The following job histories are available.

NOTE

• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.

Command Center RX User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Display Status/Log (page 8-29)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• i-FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report/List

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

Send Job Log • FAX

•i-FAX

•E-mail

• Folder

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Log • Scan

•FAX

•i-FAX

• Printer

• Join Box Document

• Copy Box Document

FAX Job Log FAX Operation Guide

7-10

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Displaying Job History Screen

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to check details.

Select the [Log] tab, and select the job to check details from the list.

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

1Display the screen.

2Check the information.

1Select the job to check details from the list, and select [Detail].

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Send Log History (page 8-44)

Displaying Job History Screen (page 7-10)

NOTE

To check the information of the next/previous page, select [ ] or [ ].

Status Log

All

Job No. End Date Type

doc20150125141427

User Name Result

Completed000080 01/25 14:14

Status

Job Name

1/1

doc20150125142253 Completed000081 01/25 14:22

doc20150125142310 Completed000082 01/25 14:23

doc20150125142458 Error000083 01/25 14:24

doc20150125143034 Completed000084 01/25 14:30

Job Type

Status

Detail

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsSending JobsPrinting Jobs Device/

Communicate

t0102

7-11

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Job Operation

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.

Printing is paused.

When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].

Canceling of Jobs

A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].

3Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Printing Jobs].

3Select the job to be given priority, and select

[Priority Override].

4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override.

7-12

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Printing Jobs].

3Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and select

[Move Up].

The priority of the selected job is increased by 1.

To further raise the job's priority, select [Move Up] again. Each time you select [Move Up], the

priority increases by 1.

7-13

Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication

Device/Communication

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Device/Communicate].

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Scanner"

The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is

displayed.

"Printer"

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or

printing are displayed.

"FAX Port 1", "FAX Port 2", "i-FAX"

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

"Removable Memory (USB Memory)"

• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are

displayed.

•Select [Format] to format external media.

•Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.

"Hard Disk"

The status of the hard disk is displayed.

"SSD"

The status of the SSD is displayed.

"Connectivity"

The network connection status and the status of the optional keyboard are displayed.

FAX Operation Guide

IMPORTANT

When [Format] is selected, all data in the external media is erased.

NOTE

When both a hard disk and SSD are installed, "Hard Disk" is displayed.

7-14

Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Paper/Supplies].

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Toner Information"

The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste

toner box.

"Paper Status"

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper

source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.

"Others"

You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.

8-1

Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-4

Counter .................................................................................................................................................... 8-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-7

Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-10

Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-31

Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-32

Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-33

Document Box/Removable Memory ...................................................................................................... 8-38

FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-39

Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-39

Report .................................................................................................................................................... 8-42

System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-47

Edit Destination ...................................................................................................................................... 8-69

User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-70

User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-70

Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-70

Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-74

Internet ................................................................................................................................................... 8-76

Application ............................................................................................................................................. 8-76

8-2

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Operation Method

1Display the screen.

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.

2Select a function.

3Configure the function.

1 Displays the System Menu items.

2 Scrolls up and down when the list of

values cannot be displayed in its entirety

on a single screen.

3 Displays setting items

Select the key of a function to display the

setting screen.

4 Returns to the previous screen.

1 Enter a setting by selecting it.

2 Accepts the settings and exits.

3 Returns to the previous screen without

making any changes.

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

Change

Date/Time:

Status

Date Format:

Time Zone: Auto Panel Reset:

Low Power Timer:

Sleep Timer:

Auto Error Clear:

Panel Reset Timer:

Change

1/2

m02015701

System Menu

Status

1/2

m01010101

Quick Setup Wizard

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Home

Send

FAX

Report

Common Settings

Copy

Document Box/Removable Memory

Printer

Counter

Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone

Set time zone.

Select the location nearest you.

Time Zone

-12:00 International Date Line West

1/16

+13:00 Samoa

-10:00 Hawaii

-09:00 Alaska

-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11

-08:00 Baja California

Status

Cancel OK

m031701

8-3

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

NOTE

• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to

immediately change the settings.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

8-4

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in

System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description Reference

Page

Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Network and Energy

Saver settings.

page 2-42

Counter Check the number of sheets printed and scanned. page 2-58

Cassette/MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multipurpose

tray.

page 8-7

Cassette 1 (to 4) Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 4). page 8-7

MP Tray Setting Select type of paper in multipurpose tray. page 8-8

Common Settings Configure overall machine operation. page 8-10

Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display. page 8-10

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-10

Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-10

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter

characters.

page 8-11

Original/Paper Settings Configure settings for originals and paper. page 8-11

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-15

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has

occurred.

page 8-16

Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from

Document Box, computers, and FAX RX data.

page 8-17

Orientation Confirmation Check the orientation of original. page 8-18

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is

completed or the [Reset] key is selected.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending.

Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent

jobs easier.

page 8-18

Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use. page 8-21

System Stamp Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp. page 8-22

Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple. page 8-28

Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job. page 8-28

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when

to order a toner when the toner is running low.

page 8-29

Offset One Page

Documents

Set whether one-page documents are sorted. page 8-29

8-5

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-29

Customize Status Display Select the item that appears for the printing jobs status. page 8-29

Message Board Settings Configure settings for message board. page 8-30

Remote Printing Configure settings for remote printing. page 8-30

Numeric Keypad Settings Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad. page 8-31

Prevent Light Reflection Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas

feature.

page 8-31

Function Key Assignment Assign a function to each function key. page 8-31

Show Power Off Message Select whether the confirmation message is displayed, when

Power Switch is pressed.

page 8-31

Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-31

Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-32

Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-33

Document Box/Removable

Memory

Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub

Address Box and Polling Box. For details on FAX Box and Polling

Box, refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

page 8-38

FAX Configures settings for fax functions.

FAX Operation Guide

—

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the

application software screen. However, the following settings are

available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

page 8-39

Report Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history.

Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

page 8-42

Print Report Configure settings for printing reports and histories. page 8-42

Admin Report Settings Refer to the

FAX

Operation

Guide.

Result Report Setting page 8-43

Sending Log History page 8-44

Device Log History

Settings

page 8-45

Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-46

Item Description Reference

Page

8-6

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network Configure machine system settings. page 8-47

Network Configures network settings. page 8-47

Optional Network Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit. page 8-60

Primary Network (Client) Select the network interface to be used for the send function that

this machine functions as a client, the network authentication and

connecting to external address book.

page 8-63

Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by

service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for

customers to use this menu.

—

Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface

with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

page 8-64

Data Security Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and

machine's memory.

page 8-65

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-67

Bluetooth Settings Set the Bluetooth keyboard. page 8-67

Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this

to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the

computer restart.)

page 8-67

NFC Set NFC (Near Field Communication). page 8-68

Edit Destination Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings.

Address Book:

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-23)

One Touch Key:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key)

(page 3-30)

page 8-69

User Login/Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management.

User Login:

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Job Accounting:

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

—

User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit

some of that information.

page 8-70

Date/Timer/Energy Saver Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-70

Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-74

Internet Configure settings related to the internet. page 8-76

Application Configure settings for Application. page 8-76

Item Description Reference

Page

8-7

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Counter

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multipurpose tray.

Cassette 1 (to 4)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to 4)]

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 4.

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size*1

*1 Only A4, Letter, and B5 can be specified when the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) is used.

Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Values: Metric, Inch

Standard Sizes 1 Available options are as follows:

Values

Metric models:

A3*2, A4-R*2, A4*2, A5-R*2, B4*2, B5-R*2, B5*2, Folio*2, 216×340 mm

Inch models:

Ledger*2, Letter-R*2, Letter*2, Legal*2, Statement-R*2, Oficio II

*2 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.

Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.

Values

Metric models:

Ledger*2, Letter-R*2, Letter*2, Legal*2, Statement-R*2, Oficio II, 8K,

16K-R, 16K

Inch models:

A3*2, A4-R*2, A4*2, A5-R*2, B4*2, B5-R*2, B5*2, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K,

216×340 mm

Media Type*3

*3 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

Select the media type.

Values: Plain (52 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (52 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,

Preprinted*4, Bond, Color, Prepunched*4, Letterhead*4, Thick (106 -

256 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

*4 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

8-8

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

MP Tray Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [MP Tray Setting]

Select paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.

Item Description

Paper Size Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Values: Metric, Inch

Standard Sizes 1 Available options are as follows:

Values

Metric models:

A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1, Folio,

216×340 mm

Inch models:

Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,

Oficio II

Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.

Values

Metric models:

Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,

Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Inch models:

A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1, Folio*1,

8K, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm

Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,

Hagaki (Cardstock)

*1,

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2

Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size.

Values

Metric

X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1mm increments)

Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Horizontal Vertical

8-9

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type*2 Select the media type.

Values: Plain (52 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to

105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color,

Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 256 g/m2),

Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8

*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the Multipurpose Tray.

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

NOTE

If the optional FAX Kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High Quality and

Custom1-8

Item Description

8-10

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Common Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Language

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Language]

Default Screen

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]

Sound

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]

Item Description

Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

Item Description

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX*1, Status, Custom Box, Job Box,

Removable Memory, FAX Box*1, Program, Home (Accessibility), Accessibility

Copy, Accessibility Send, Accessibility FAX*1, Internet Browser*2, Application

Name*3

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 Configure necessary settings for Internet Browser.

Internet (page 8-76)

*3 The running application will be displayed.

Application (page 5-12)

Item Description

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Volume Set the buzzer volume level.

Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

Optional Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.

Value: Off, On

FAX Speaker Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide

FAX Monitor Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide

8-11

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Keyboard Layout

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]

Original / Paper Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Original / Paper Settings]

Configure settings for originals and paper.

Item Description

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.

Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY

Item Description

Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.

To register a custom original size, select [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four

custom original sizes can be added.

Value

Metric

X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Vertical Horizontal

8-12

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper size in the

multipurpose tray.

To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four

custom paper sizes can be added.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Media Type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1-8

Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-5 and multipurpose tray.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 4), Multipurpose Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

Auto Switch When the optional large capacity feeder is selected, the cassette can be switched to

another large capacity feeder depending on your usage.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Vertical Horizontal

8-13

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Auto Detect Original Size Select whether to automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.

Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select

[Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.

Metric A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki (Cardstock) are similar in size, select either one of them for

automatic detection.

Value: A6, Hagaki

NOTE

If [Hagaki] is set, only the originals placed on the platen are detected.

Folio Select whether to enable automatic detection of Folio.

Value: Off, On

11×15" Select whether to enable automatic detection of 11×15" size.

Value: Off, On

Inch Legal/

Oficio II/

216×340 mm

Set the original sizes for the device to detect automatically.

Value: Legal, Oficio II, 216×340 mm

Media for Auto (B&W) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper

Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the

specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind

of paper loaded in the specific size.

Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick,

Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is

placed.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 4), Multipurpose Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

Item Description

8-14

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be

aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are

set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print

Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select

[Speed Priority].

If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority

Separator Paper Source Select the default paper source for separator sheets.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 4), Multipurpose Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

Show Paper Setup

Message

Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new

paper is set for each cassette.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

[Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

Cassette 1 to 4

Multipurpose Tray

Item Description

Multipurpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

8-15

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type Setting

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Measurement

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]

Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 1 106 g/m² to 135 g/m²

Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 2 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 3 164 g/m² to 256 g/m²

Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Extra Heavy Transparencies

Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Color Normal 3

Rough Normal 3 Prepunched Normal 2

Vellum Heavy 1 Letterhead Heavy 1

Labels Heavy 2 Envelope Heavy 2

Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 2

Preprinted Heavy 1 High Quality Normal 2

Bond Normal 3 Coated Heavy 1

Cardstock Heavy 3 Custom 1 - 8 Normal 2

Item Description

Duplex Print Prohibit Duplex printing allowed.

Permit Duplex printing not allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.

Selecting media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Description

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: mm, inch

8-16

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Error Handling

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]

Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.

Item Description

Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and

media types.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset) is not available for the

selected paper size or media type.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Finished Pages Exceeded Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during

printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Punch Waste Full Error Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without punching.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.

Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or

type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by

specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

8-17

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Output

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Output]

Inserted Paper Mismatch Set what to do when it is detected that the multipurpose tray paper size setting does

not match the actual paper size that is fed.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Paper Jam before Staple The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with

stapling can be selected.

Value

Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.

Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Item Description

Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document Box,

computers, and FAX RX data.

Value:

• Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine

• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher

• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

• Finisher Tray: Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document

Finisher.

with optional 3,000-Sheet Finisher

• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document

Finisher

• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document

Finisher

with optional Mailbox

• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document

Finisher

• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document

Finisher

• Tray 1 to 7: Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of

the optional Mailbox

NOTE

FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Description

8-18

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Orientation Confirmation

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Orientation Confirmation]

Function Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]

Item Description

Orientation Confirmation Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be

placed on the platen when using the following functions.

Original Orientation (page 6-23)

• Zoom (XY Zoom)

•Duplex

• Margin/Centering

• Border Erase

• Combine

• Memo Page

Value: Off, On

• Page #

• Booklet

• Staple/Punch (optional feature)

• 2-sided/Book Original

•Text Stamp

• Bates Stamp

Item Description

Orig. Orientation (Copy) Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto*1

Orig. Orient.(Send/Store)

Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.

Value: Text+Photo (Printer), Text+Photo (Magazine), Photo (Printer), Photo

(Magazine), Photo (Photo Paper), Text, Text (Fine Line), Graphic/Map (Printer),

Graphic/Map (Magazine)

Org. Image (Send/Store) Set the default original document type for sending/storing.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text(Fine Line), Text (for OCR)

FAX TX Resolution*2 FAX Operation Guide

Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super Fine,

200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal

Color Selection Select the default color mode for scanning documents.

Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,

Black & White

File Format Set the default type of the files.

Value: PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, High Comp. PDF, Word, Excel,

PowerPoint

Backgrnd Density (Copy) Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

BackgrndDens. (Send/

Store)

Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send/Store).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).

Value: Off, On

8-19

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Prevent Bleed (Send/Store) Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).

Value: Off, On

Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the

originals set.

Value: 100%, Auto

Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border.

Value

Metric: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

NOTE

To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify

border erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".

Border Erase to Back Page Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet.

Value: Same as Front Page, Do Not Erase

Margin Default Set the default margin.

Value

Metric

Left/Right: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.

Value: Off, On

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).

Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)

NOTE

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

High Comp. PDF Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority

Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format.

Value: TIFF V6, TTN2

Image Quality (File Format) Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS/Word/Excel/PowerPoint file

quality.

Value: 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.

Value

Collate: Off, On

Offset: Off, Each Set (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is set to [Each Page].)

Item Description

8-20

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution

XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as

Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time,

Date and Time & Job No.

E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when

sending the scanned originals by E-mail. Three body messages can be registered,

and the initial template can be used to choose which body message is used.

Value

Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Body 1 to 3: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

i-FAX Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when

sending the scanned originals by i-FAX.

Value

Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" (page 11-6)

DP Read Action Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.

Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional document processor is installed.

OCR Text Recognition Set the default OCR Text Recognition.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

Primary OCR Language Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a

default.)

Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.

NOTE

This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

Item Description

8-21

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Optional Keyboard Type

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Optional Keyboard Type]

Repeat Copy Select the Repeat Copy default.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.

• This function will not be displayed when Repeat Copy Job Retention is set to 0.

Skip Blank Page (Copy) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings.

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank Page (Send/

Store)

File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you select [On], set the number of pages to be divided. The setting range is 1 to 500

pages.

Cont. Scan (Copy) Select the default Continuous Scan (Copy) setting.

Value: Off, On

Continuous Scan (FAX)*2 FAX Operation Guide

Cont. Scan (Send/Store) Select the default Continuous Scan (Send/Store) setting.

Value: Off, On

*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Description

Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English

Item Description

8-22

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Stamp

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [System Stamp]

Item Description

Basic Configure settings for stamps.

Text (Text Stamp) Select [Add/Edit] to edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be

registered. Select [Delete] to delete a template.

Font (Page #) Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Font (Bates Stamp) When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Font (Text Stamp) Set the font size for stamps when printing them.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

8-23

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printing Jobs Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.

After configuring the setting, return to the Copying Functions or Custom Box (Printing

a Document) screen from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.

Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.

Edit Text Stamp Set the default text stamp.

Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a

maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer

to the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Stamp Method Select the stamp method for the text stamp.

Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail

NOTE

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set

the stamp position and angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in

duplex printing.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Color: Black, White

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Item Description

8-24

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printing Jobs

Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.

Edit Bates Stamp Set the default Bates Stamp.

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,

Numbering Default, Position, Font

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32

characters for the text string.

To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric

values, and to set the stamp position to be placed on the back side of the paper in

duplex printing.

Item Description

8-25

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sending Jobs Configure stamp settings for sending documents.

After configuring the setting, return to the Sending Functions or Custom Box (Sending

Documents) screen from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.

Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.

Edit Text Stamp Set the default text stamp.

Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a

maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to the

following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail

NOTE

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set

the stamp angle.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Color: Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Item Description

8-26

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sending Jobs

Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when sending.

Edit Bates Stamp Set the default Bates Stamp.

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,

Numbering Default, Position, Font

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32

characters for the text string.

To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric

values.

Item Description

8-27

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Storing Jobs Configure stamp settings for storing documents in removable memory.

After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Storing Documents) screen

from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.

Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all storing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.

Edit Text Stamp Set the default text stamp.

Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a

maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer to the

following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail

NOTE

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set

the stamp angle.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-22)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Color: Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, White

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Item Description

8-28

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Manual Staple

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Manual Staple]

Offset Documents by Job

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset Documents by Job]

Storing Jobs

Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all storing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when storing.

Edit Bates Stamp Set the default Bates Stamp.

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,

Numbering Default, Position, Font

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32

characters for the text string.

To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric

values.

NOTE

Only displayed when the optional 3,000-Sheet Finisher is installed.

Item Description

Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically

cancelled. The setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).

Staple Position Set the default Staple Position.

Value: A4, Letter

Item Description

Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.

Item Description

8-29

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Low Toner Alert

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Low Toner Alert]

Offset One Page Documents

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset One Page Documents]

Display Status/Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]

Set the display method of the Status/Log.

Customize Status Display

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Customize Status Display]

Set the items that appear in the status screens for printing jobs, sending jobs, and storing jobs.

Item Description

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner

when the toner is running low.

This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to

100% (in 1% increments).

Item Description

Offset One Page

Documents

Set whether one-page documents are sorted.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.

Item Description

Display Jobs Detail Status Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display FAX Log*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Value: Show All, Hide All

Item Description

Printing Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages

Printing Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages

Sending Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Sending Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Destination, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Storing Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Storing Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

8-30

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Message Board Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Message Board Settings]

Remote Printing

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Remote Printing]

Item Description

Message Board Select whether to use the Message Board.

Value: Off, On

Message List Configure settings for the registered message board.

Add Add a new message board.

Device to Show Select where to show the message.

Value

Hide: Displays no message.

Operation Panel: Displays a message on the operation panel.

Embedded Web Server: Displays a message in Command Center RX.

Panel + Web Server: Displays a message in the operation panel and the

Command Center RX.

Message Type Select the message type.

Value: Normal, Alert, Prohibition

Place to Show Select where to show the message in the touch panel.

Value:

Home Screen: Home Screen

administration

Priority Show Displays the message on the message board.

Value: Off, On

Title Enter a maximum of 30 characters for the title to display on the message board.

Body Enter a maximum of 300 characters for the body to display on the message board.

Delete Deletes the message board selected on the list.

Raise Priority Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.

Lower Priority Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.

Detail/Edit Display information on the selected message board.

Item Description

Remote Printing Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine.

When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box

from the printer driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents another person

from seeing that document.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

NOTE

If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold

functions are disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.

8-31

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Numeric Keypad Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Numeric Keypad Settings]

Prevent Light Reflection

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Prevent Light Reflection]

Function Key Assignment

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]

Show Power Off Message

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Show Power Off Message]

Home

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]

Configure settings for Home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-15)

Item Description

Default

Display

Copy/Print

from Box

Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad.

Value: Off, On

HyPAS

Application

Layout (HyPAS Application) Select the HyPAS numeric keypad layout to display upon startup.

Value: Floating, Horizontal, On the Right

Item Description

Prevent Light Reflection Prevent light reflection when using the Erase Shadowed Areas feature.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Function Key 1 Assign a function to each function key.

Value: Copy, Send, FAX*1, Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory, FAX Box,

Send to Me (E-mail), Send to Me from Box (E-mail), Internet Browser, None,

Program*2, Application*3

NOTE

You can select the functions to be displayed for [All], [Application], [Program] and

[Others].

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 The registered program will be displayed.

*3 The running application will be displayed.

Function Key 2

Function Key 3

Item Description

Show Power Off Message Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.

Value: Off, On

8-32

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Copy

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Copy]

Configures settings for copying functions.

Item Description

Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value: Auto, Default Paper Source

Auto Image Rotation Action Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is

different from the orientation of the paper.

Value

Unrotated Manual Copy: If a paper source or zoom ratio is specified, the image

is not rotated.

Apply All: Rotates all images.

Follow Image Size: The image is rotated if the rotated image fits on the paper.

Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when

the zoom changes.

Value

Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size

of the original.

Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original,

regardless the zoom.

Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether

automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.

Value: Off, On

Paper Size for Small

Original

Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be

detected in the Auto Paper Selection mode.

Value: Default Paper Source, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Letter-R,

Letter, Statement-R

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved

while printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].

Value: Off, On

Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup.

Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be

changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch*1, Density, Duplex, Combine,

Collate/Offset, Original Image, Original Size, Original Orientation,

Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.

*1 This setting is displayed when the optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this

item name is "Staple".

8-33

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Send

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send]

Configures settings for sending functions.

Item Description

Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup

screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Value: Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original*1, Sending Size, Original

Orientation, File Format, Density, Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX

Resolution*2, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan, Background Density

Adj.

Dest. Check before Send Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the

[Start] key when performing sending jobs.

Value: Off, On

Color Type Set the color type when you send color documents.

Value: RGB, sRGB

Entry Check for New Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to

check the entered destination.

Value: Off, On

Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.

Value: Destination, Address Book

8-34

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images.

Forward Select whether to forward the original.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [E-mail], [Folder(SMB)],

[Folder(FTP)], [FAX]*2, [i-FAX(Via server-On)]*3, and [i-FAX(Via server-Off)]*3.

Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set.

Follow the steps below to register the destination.

• Address Book

• E-mail Addr Entry

• Folder Path Entry

Specifying Destination (page 5-40)

Color Setting Configure the color settings for forwarded original.

Value: Auto Color (Color/Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale,

Black & White

Scan Resolution Select resolution for stored original.

Value: 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi Super Fine,

200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal

File Format Select the file format of forwarded original.

File format for Send and Forward (page 8-35)

File Separation Set whether originals are divided into multiple files before being forwarded.

Value: Off, Each Page

E-mail Subject Enter a maximum of 60 characters for the subject of forwarded E-mail.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

FTP Encrypted TX Set whether originals are encrypted before being forwarded.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when SSL is set to [On] in Security Settings.

Security Settings (page 8-58)

New Destination Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Broadcast Set whether to enable broadcast.

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Item Description

8-35

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

File format for Send and Forward

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send] > [Send and Forward] > [File Format]

Select the file format for forwarded original.

The table below lists the file formats and their details.

HighCompressionPDF

Mode

Select the compression method for sending High-Compression PDF.

Value: Text Priority, File Size Priority

OCR Text Recognition Act. Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.

Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority

NOTE

This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.

Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" (page 11-6)

*1 When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".

*2 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.

*3 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

File format Adjustable range of image quality Color setting

PDF*1 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and

White

TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and

White

JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale

XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and

White

OpenXPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and

White

High Comp. PDF *1

*1 File format can be selected. (Value: [Off] / [PDF/A-1a] / [PDF/A-1b] / [PDF/A-2a] / [PDF/A-2b] / [PDF/A-2u])

Compression Ratio Priority,

Standard, Quality Priority

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/

Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale

Item Description

8-36

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in "Compatibility".

When [Acrobat 3.0 or later] is selected

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send] > [Send and Forward] > [File Format] > [PDF/High Comp. PDF] >

[Encryption]

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Detail Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Page Layout except

extracting Pages

Can change the page layout except extracting the pages

of the PDF file.

Any except extracting

Pages

Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Copying of

Text/Images/

Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

8-37

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

When [Acrobat 5.0 or later] is selected

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send] > [Send and Forward] > [File Format] > [PDF/High Comp. PDF] >

[Encryption]

Item Value Description

Password to Open

Document

Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [Password], enter a password (up to 256

characters) and then select [OK].

Select [Confirmation] to enter the password again for

confirmation, and select [OK].

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Detail Printing

Allowed

Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed

(Low Resolution only)

Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes

Allowed

Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Inserting/Deleting/

Rotating Pages

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF

file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Any except extracting

Pages

Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Copying of

Text/Images/

Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

8-38

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Document Box/Removable Memory

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Document Box/Removable Memory]

Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.

Item Description

Custom Box Configure settings for Custom Box.

Add/Edit Box Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-52)

Default Setting Auto File Deletion Time

Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.

FAX Box*1 FAX Operation Guide

Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.

Quick Copy Job

Retention

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored

jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 300

NOTE

When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.

Repeat Copy Job

Retention

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored

jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 50

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.

When 0 is set, Repeat Copy cannot be used.

Deletion of Job

Retention

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or

Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted

after they have been saved for a set time.

Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this

function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned

off.

Polling Box*1 FAX Operation Guide

8-39

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

FAX

[System Menu/Counter] key > [FAX]

Configure settings for FAX.

FAX Operation Guide

Printer

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer]

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following

settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup

screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Store File Select the functions to be registered for Store File Quick Setup.

Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original*2, Scan

Resolution, Zoom, Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image,

Continuous Scan, Background Density Adj.

Value: Off, Key 1 to 6

Print Select the functions to be registered for Print Quick Setup.

Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch, Duplex*3, Combine, Delete after

Printed

Value: Off, Key 1 to 6

Send Select the functions to be registered for Send Quick Setup.

Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution*1, File Format, Delete after Transmitted, Color

Selection

Value: Off, Key 1 to 6

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 When the optional document processor is not installed, this is set to "Book Original".

*3 Display only when an optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item name

is "Staple".

Item Description

Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types

of printers.

Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)

NOTE

When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.

When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.

Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between

KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to

the data to print.

Value: PCL6

KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or

not the error report is output.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-40

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where

faded printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).

Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)

NOTE

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size

when printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use

whichever size is in the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is

no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.

When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options

are between 5 and 495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character

code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code

(character code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.

& Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].

User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source

and type are specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Item Description

8-41

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray

in the paper feed.

Value

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP

tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.

Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP

tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while

printing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette

#." (# is a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray.",

and stops printing.

• Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.

• To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the

desired paper source.

• When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other

cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a

line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at

10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi

NOTE

Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation

panel settings.

KIR Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.

Value: Off, On

Printing Job Terminator You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could

not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason.

Value:

EOJ (End of Job): The command recognized as a termination of the job data is

regarded as one job until it is detected.

End of Network Session: The data included in a network session at network

connection is regarded as one job.

UEL (Universal Exit Language): The UEL included in the termination of the job

data is regarded as one job until it is detected.

Item Description

8-42

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Report

Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

Print Report

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Print Report]

Item Description

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current

settings, memory capacity, and optional equipment installed.

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network

interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status

Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance

purpose.

Status Page

Network Status Page

8-43

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Admin Report Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Admin Report Settings]

Configure settings for Outgoing FAX report and Incoming FAX report.

FAX Operation Guide

Result Report Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Result Report Setting]

Optional Network Status Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including

optional network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless

Network Interface Kit is installed.

Data Sanitization Report Prints the data sanitization report.

Item Description

Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.

E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP

transmission is complete.

Value: Off, On, Error Only

FAX*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

FAX Operation Guide

Canceled before

Sending*2

*2 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.

Value: Off, On

Recipient Format*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.

Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination

FAX RX Result Report*1 FAX Operation Guide

Job Finish Notice Setting*1 FAX Operation Guide

RX Result Report Type*1*3

*3 This is not displayed if you selected [Off] for FAX RX Result Report.

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

8-44

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sending Log History

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Sending Log History]

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Login History Settings]

Item Description

Auto Sending

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations

whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 1,500.

Send Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.

Job Log Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

SSFC Log Subject Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card authentication.

Value: Up to 60 characters

Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.

Value: Include, Exclude

Item Description

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The setting range is 1

to 1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set address when the

number of entries reaches the number set in "Login History".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Destination

Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as

destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Log Reset Resets the recorded login histories.

8-45

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Device Log History Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Device Log History Settings]

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Item Description

Device Log History Select whether to record the device log history.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to

1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the set address when

the number of entries reaches the number set in "Device Log History".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].

Destination Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail address only can be

set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

8-46

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Secure Comm. Error Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Secure Comm. Error Log]

Item Description

Secure Comm. Error Log Select whether to record the secure communication error log history.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to

1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the secure communication error log history is automatically sent to the

set address when the number of entries reaches the number set in "Secure Comm.

Error Log".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to

[On].

Destination Set the destination to which secure communication error log histories are sent. E-mail

address only can be set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to

[

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure communication error log

histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to

[On].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

8-47

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network

Configures machine system settings.

Network

Configures network settings.

Host Name

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Host Name]

Wired Network Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Settings]

Configure wired network settings.

TCP/IP Setting

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command

Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-64)

Item Description

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is set to [On].

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

8-48

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the

network.

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the

network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP

(IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting

of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated

by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of

four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by

colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the

network.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-49

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

LAN Interface

Wi-Fi Direct Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]

Set Wi-Fi Direct.

Item Description

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.

Value:

Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full,

1000BASE-T

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

Item Description

Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

Device Name Specify the device name.

NOTE

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-47)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

8-50

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wi-Fi Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Settings]

Set Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi

Setup

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

Item Description

Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.

Value:

Off, On

Item Description

Connection Status Check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless

network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect.

WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.

Value:

0 to 3

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be

configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the

connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access

point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

8-51

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine

connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Network

Authentication

Select network authentication type.

Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP

Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network

Authentication setting.

Item Description

Network

Authentication

Encryption

Open Disable ―

WEP WEP Key: Up to 26 characters

WEP Key Index: 0 to 3

WPA2/WPA-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2-PSK Data Encryption: AES

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2/WPA-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto

WPA2-EAP Data Encryption: AES

8-52

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

TCP/IP Setting

Item Description

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is set to [On].

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-53

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Restart Network

Item Description

IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the

network.

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the

network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP

(IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting

of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated

by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of

four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by

colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the

network.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

8-54

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Bonjour

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Bonjour]

IPSec

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IPSec]

Protocol Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]

Configure protocol settings.

Item Description

Bonjour Select whether to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

IPSec Select whether to use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

FTP Client (Transmission) Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use the FTP Client, set the protocol

to [On]. The default port number is 21.

Value: Off, On

FTP Server (Reception) Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

SMB Client (Transmission): Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use the SMB Client, set the

protocol to [On]. The default port number is 445.

Value: Off, On

NetBEUI Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

8-55

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

WSD Scan Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

WSD Print Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and

Network FAX driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

i-FAX Select whether to use i-FAX.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

DSM Scan Select whether to use DSM scan.*1

Value: Off, On

ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to

[On]. The default port number is 4000.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL] to [On].

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the

self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

LPD Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

8-56

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Raw Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

IPP Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] to

[On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure (IPP&IPPS)] on IPP

Security under Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The default port

number is 631.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

IPP over SSL To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is

443.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the

self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

HTTP Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

HTTPS Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-57

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

SNMPv1/v2c Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

SNMPv3 Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Enhanced WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Enhanced WSD over SSL Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX drivers.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

eSCL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

eSCL over SSL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.*1, *2

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

8-58

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Security Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Security Settings]

VNC (RFB) This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use the Remote

Operation.*1

The default port number is 9062.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

VNC (RFB) over SSL This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use Remote Operation

protected by SSL.*1, *2

The default port number is 9063.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the

self-certificate of the machine.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Enhanced VNC over SSL This is set when starting up Command Center RX to use Remote Operation protected

by SSL.*1, *2

The default port number is 9061.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• The default setting is [On].

• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is

the self-certificate of the machine.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings.

Security Settings (page 8-58)

IMPORTANT

Depending on the protocol, there are models where you need to restart the network or turn the machine OFF

and then ON after changing the setting.

Item Description

SSL Select whether to use SSL for communication.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-59

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Proxy

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Proxy]

Ping

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Ping]

Restart Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]

Item Description

Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.

Value: Off, On

Use the Same Proxy

Server for All

Protocols

Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols. To use the same proxy

server, select the [Use the Same Proxy Server for All Protocols] checkbox.

Proxy Server (HTTP) Set a proxy server (HTTP).

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Proxy Server (HTTPS) Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy

Server for All Protocols" is [Off].

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Do Not Use Proxy for

Following Domains

Set domains for which no proxy is used.

Value: (Enter the domain name.)

Item Description

Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP

address of the destination is possible.

NOTE

If [Primary Network (Client)] is set to [Others], this item is not displayed.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

8-60

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Optional Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Network]

Basic

Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.

NOTE

This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command

Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-64)

TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-47)

Bonjour (page 8-54)

IPSec (page 8-54)

NetWare Use NetWare to receive documents.

See the Operation Guide for the optional network interface card for details.

Value: Off, On

AppleTalk Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.*1

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full,

1000BASE-T

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.

MAC Address Filter Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.

Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit

Value: Off, On

Restart Network Restarts the network card of the device.

8-61

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wireless Network

Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.

Item Description

Connection Status You can check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup

If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless

network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

Available Network Select access points to which the machine can be connected, enter the Preshared

Key and start a connection.

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be

configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the

connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access

point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

PIN Code Method

(Terminal)

Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the

access point.

8-62

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine

connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Connection Mode Set the connection mode.

Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure

NOTE

Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an access

point. This method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.

Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.

Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Value: 1 to 11

Network

Authentication

Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home

page from a computer.

Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1

Encryption Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected, enter the

WEP key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the Network

Authentication setting. Select [Data Encryption].

When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]:

Value: Disable, WEP

When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:

Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key

NOTE

• If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be entered.

• If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value in 8

to 64 characters.

*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".

*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".

Item Description

8-63

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Primary Network (Client)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Primary Network (Client)]

Security Level

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51 or

IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

Item Description

Primary Network (Client) Select the network interface to be used for the send function that this machine

functions as a client, the network authentication and connecting to external address

book.

Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network

NOTE

•[Wi-Fi] is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

•[Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50)

or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.

• You can set and use "[Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]", and "[Optional Network] (IB-

50 or IB-51)" individuayly for the e-mail send connection.

Item Description

Security Level Specify the security level.

Value

Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.

High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting

normally.

Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine

settings to be changed from external command.

NOTE

This function is available when you have logged in as machine administrator.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

8-64

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Interface Block Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Interface Block Setting]

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional

interfaces.

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].

Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

You can set this feature for each slot.

Optional Interface 2

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-65

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Security

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Data Security]

Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory.

Item Description

SSD Initialization

Hard Disk Initialization

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization

Change security functions.

NOTE

• This function is displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.

• Display changes according to the large storage capacity installed on this machine.

When an SSD is installed: SSD Initialization

When a hard disk is installed: Hard Disk Initialization

When a hard disk and an SSD are installed: Hard Disk/SSD Initialization

• Enter the security password to change security functions.

Data Overwrite

Method

The method used to overwrite data can be changed.

Refer to the following for details.

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

Value

Once Overwrite: This function overwrites unneeded data areas (in the case of

overwriting) or all areas (in the case of system initialization) with zeroes to

prevent data restoration.

3-time Overwrite (DoD): This overwrite method complies with U.S. Department

of Defense (DoD) standards, and overwrites unneeded data areas of the hard

disk (in the case of overwriting) or all areas (in the case of system initialization)

with specific characters, their complements, and random characters to prevent

data restoration. Data restoration is not possible even when sophisticated

restoration techniques are used, and a higher level of security than Once

Overwrite is obtained.

NOTE

This method may take more time than Once Overwrite method to process a larger

amount of data.

Security Password Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the security

kit.

Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Enter the password again for confirmation.

IMPORTANT

Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or

12345678).

System Initialization Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk/SSD when disposing of the machine.

IMPORTANT

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the hard disk/

SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail.

NOTE

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch

on again. Initialization automatically restarts.

8-66

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.

• Address Book

• Favorites

• System settings

• Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data

• Transmission histories

• Local FAX Name

• Local FAX Number

• Data saved in Custom Box

• Optional applications

NOTE

• Print the data sanitization report and then confirm that security data is deleted.

Data Sanitization Report (page 8-43)

• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.

• Before performing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.

• Before performing this function, set all interface block settings to [Unblock].

Interface Block Setting (page 8-64)

• Do not turn the power off while sanitizing the data. If the power is turned off during

data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored,

however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.

Run Immediately Data Sanitization will be performed.

Reserve a

Sanitization Time

Completely erase address and image data saved in the device at the scheduled time.

Value: Off, On

If [On] is selected, set the date and time that sanitization is to be performed. The

setting range is Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23).

Device Use After

Sanitization

The device use restriction after the data sanitization is completed.

The device cannot be used if [Prohibit] is selected.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Software Verification Verify the installed software.

Select [Start] to start verification.

If an error occurs during software verification, contact your dealer or service

representative.

Item Description

8-67

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Information erased

Optional Function

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]

Bluetooth Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Bluetooth Settings]

Restart Entire Device

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Restart Entire Device]

Category Data erased

Devices/jobs • Job settings configured by users

• Network settings

• Image data saved in Document Box, etc.

• Data registered in One Touch keys

• Job histories

• User information (user list, address book, Document Box registered by the user,

etc.)

• Account information of job accounting

• Network certificates

• Initial screen on machine changed by service representative

FAX*1

*1 Only when the optional fax kit is installed.

• Fax settings configured by users

• Communication restriction settings

• Encryption key settings

• Transmission histories

• Scheduled jobs

• Conditional reception/forwarding settings

Application/program • Application/program added by a user or service representative

• Trial functions

Item Description

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

Item Description

Bluetooth Keyboard Use Bluetooth keyboard.

Value: Off, On

Search Device Select a keyboard.

Item Description

Restart Entire Device Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any

unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

8-68

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

NFC

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [NFC]

Remote Operation

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Operation]

Item Description

NFC Use NFC (Near Field Communication).

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Remote Operation Configure settings for remote operation.

Value: Off, Use Password, Administrator Only

When selecting [Off], users without administrator privileges can also execute remote

operation.

When selecting [Use Password], enter the password, then re-enter it to confirm.

When selecting [Administrator Only], only administrator can execute remote

operation.

NOTE

When selecting [Administrator Only], the remote operation using VNC software is

unavailable.

8-69

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Edit Destination

Address Book

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Address Book]

Configure settings for address book.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-23)

One Touch Key

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [One Touch Key]

Configure settings for One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-30)

Print list

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Print list]

FAX Operation Guide

Address Book Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Address Book Defaults]

Edit Restriction

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Edit Destination] > [Edit Restriction]

Item Description

Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.

Value: No., Name

Narrow Down This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed

when the address book is displayed.

Value: Off, E-mail, Folder, FAX*1, i-FAX*2, Group

*1 Displayed only when the optional fax kit is installed.

*2 This function is displayed when the optional Internet FAX Kit is activated.

Address Book Type*3

*3 This display appears only if the external address book is available.

Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book appears

when the address book is displayed.

Value: Machine Address Book, Ext Address Book

Item Description

Address Book Restrict editing of the address book. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can

only edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.

Value: Off, Administrator Only

One-Touch Key Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can

only edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges.

Value: Off, Administrator Only

8-70

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

Configure settings related to machine management.

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-52)

User Property

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]

Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

Configures settings related to the date and time.

Item Description

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform

Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute

(00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

NOTE

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no

longer be able to use the application.

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western

notation.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If

you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Setting Date and Time (page 2-29)

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to

the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following:

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-71)

Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be

taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a

set amount of time elapses.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

For setting the automatic error recovery time, refer to the following:

Error Clear Timer (page 8-71)

8-71

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Low Power Timer

Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.

Value

For Europe: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Low Power Mode (page 2-39)

Panel Reset Timer

If you select [

] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel

Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value

For Europe

1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe

1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set

to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

Error Job Skip

Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multipurpose

tray" error occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period

of time elapses.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.

• If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90

(5 second increments).

Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before

automatically clearing errors.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].

Unusable Time*1 Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes.

FAX Operation Guide.

Sleep Rules (models for

Europe)

Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:

• ID Card Reader*2

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• If the sleep condition is not turned off, the machine will not wake from sleep mode

even if it receives a print job from a computer connected by USB cable. Also, the

ID card cannot be recognized.

• This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery

controller is installed.

Item Description

8-72

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sleep Level (models except

for Europe)

Select the sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal

Sleep mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery

controller is installed.

Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

• ID Card Reader*2

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card

cannot be recognized.

EnergySaver

RecoveryLevel

Select the method of recovery from energy saver.

Value:

Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.

However, this mode saves less energy.

Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:

enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling

the use of desired functions only.

If you want to use all functions immediately, select the

[Energy Saver] key to execute recovery.

Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only.

This mode saves energy most effectively.

Weekly Timer Settings Configure settings for switching the machine to OFF and waking it automatically at a

specified time for each day of the week.

Weekly Timer Select whether to use Weekly Timer.

Value: Off, On

Schedule Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine turns OFF.

Retry Times Set the number of retries for turning OFF this machine.

Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries

NOTE

If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to 10.

Retry is not performed when "0" is set.

If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine turns OFF.

Retry Interval Set the retry interval.

Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.

Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)

Item Description

8-73

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Power Off Rule (models for

Europe)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function.

Select [On] to set the Power Off mode.

•Network

•FAX

• USB Cable

• USB Host

•NIC

• Remote Diagnostics

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if either [FAX] or [NIC] is set to [Off],

the machine does not enter Power Off Mode.

Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not

communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.

Power Off Timer (models

for Europe)

Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.

Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours,

1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week

Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".

Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*2 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

*3 Displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

8-74

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Adjustment/Maintenance

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Item Description

Density Adjustment Adjust density.

Copy Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment

can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

FAX*1 FAX Operation Guide

Background Density Adj. Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.

Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.

Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them

in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Sharpness Adjustment Adjust the sharpness of the image outline.

Copy All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7

levels.

Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)

Text/Fine

Line

Sharpen text/fine line during copying. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.

Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)

Send/Box All Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending or storing them in the Document

Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.

Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)

Text/Fine

Line

Adjust sharpness of the text/fine line when during sending or storing them in the

Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 4 levels.

Value: 0 (Normal), 1, 2, 3 (Sharpen)

Correcting Black Lines Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the

image, when the document processor is used.

Value

Off: No correction performed.

On (Low): Correction performed. The reproduction of fine lines on the original

may become lighter than when using [Off].

On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The

reproduction of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using

[On (Low)].

System Initialization Initialize the hard disk/SSD installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults.

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.

8-75

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)

Silent Mode Set the Silent Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, it may take time for the next print job to start.

Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine

whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting

a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value

will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.

Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)

Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the

printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure

consistency with the original tone.

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-41)

Drum Refresh 1 Remove image blur from the printout. It takes about 1 minute. The time required may

vary depending on the operating environment.

Drum Refresh 1 (page 10-42)

NOTE

Drum Refresh 1 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh 1 after

the printing is done.

Drum Refresh 2 Remove white dots from the printout. It takes about 80 seconds. To use [Drum

Refresh 2], load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multipurpose tray.

When you run [Drum Refresh 2], the machine sometimes makes a vibrating sound

for about 80 seconds until drum refreshing is completed. The toner soiling on the

ejected paper is normal and does not indicate a fault.

Drum Refresh 2 (page 10-43)

NOTE

Drum Refresh 2 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh 2 after

the printing is done.

Memory Diagnostics Perform this function to check the machine memory.

Contrast You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.

Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)

Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a

document box.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)

Item Description

8-76

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Internet

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Internet]

Configure settings related to the internet.

Application

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

Configure settings for Application.

Application (page 5-12)

Auto Drum Refresh Select the time length of the drum refresh.

Value

Off: The Auto Drum Refresh will not be performed.

Short: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Short.

Standard: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard.

Long: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long.

Print Density Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.

Value: 1 to 5

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Description

Internet Browser Select whether to use the Internet browser.

Value: Off, On

Browser Environment This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how

pages are displayed.

Value:

Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)

Text Size: Large, Medium, Small

Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering

Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting

Internet Browser (page 8-76)

NOTE

To use proxy from Internet Browser, refer to the following:

Proxy (page 8-59)

Item Description

9-1

9 User Authentication

and Accounting

(User Login,

Job Accounting)

This chapter explains the following topics:

Overview of User Login Administration ......... 9-2

Managing the Job Account from PC ... 9-2

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN

for Scanning ........................................ 9-2

Managing the Users to Use WIA for

Scanning ............................................. 9-2

Managing the Users to Send Faxes

from a PC ............................................ 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration .............. 9-3

Setting User Login Administration ................. 9-5

Authentication Security ....................... 9-5

Adding a User (Local User List) .......... 9-8

Changing User Properties ................. 9-11

User Login Administration for Printing ... 9-14

Managing the Users to Scan Using

TWAIN .............................................. 9-15

Managing the Users to Scan Using

WIA ................................................... 9-16

Managing the Users that Send Faxes

from a PC .......................................... 9-17

Local Authorization ........................... 9-18

Group Authorization Settings ............ 9-19

Guest Authorization Set. ................... 9-22

Obtain NW User Property ................. 9-25

Simple Login Settings ....................... 9-27

ID Card Settings ............................... 9-30

PIN Code Authorization .................... 9-31

Using User Login Administration ................. 9-32

Overview of Job Accounting ....................... 9-33

To Manage the Number of Sheets

Used on Jobs Printed from a PC ...... 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by

Using TWAIN .................................... 9-33

Managing the Scan Job Account by

Using WIA ......................................... 9-33

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted

from a PC .......................................... 9-33

Enabling Job Accounting ............................ 9-34

Job Accounting Access ..................... 9-35

Job Accounting (Local) ............................... 9-36

Adding an Account ............................ 9-36

Restricting the Use of the Machine ... 9-37

Editing an Account ............................ 9-38

Deleting an Account .......................... 9-39

Job Accounting for Printing ............... 9-40

Job Accounting for Scan Using

TWAIN .............................................. 9-41

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA .... 9-42

Job Accounting for the FAX

Transmitted from a Computer ........... 9-43

Configuring Job Accounting ........................ 9-44

Default Setting .................................. 9-44

Counting the Number of Pages

Printed .............................................. 9-46

Print Accounting Report .................... 9-48

Using Job Accounting ................................. 9-49

Apply Limit .................................................. 9-50

Copy/Printer Count ..................................... 9-51

Unknown ID Job .......................................... 9-52

Unknown ID Job ............................... 9-52

Registering Information for a User whose ID

is Unknown ....................................... 9-53

9-2

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration

Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user

name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified

only by the "Machine Administrator".

Managing the Job Account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.

To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-15)

Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-16)

Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-17)

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

UserA

1Enable User Login

Administration (page 9-3)2Set the user

(page 9-8)3Enter the login user name and password

and execute the job (page 9-32)

User A

User B

User C

1Set the User Login

Administration on the printer

driver (page 9-14)

2Print

9-3

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

Enabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "User Login" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (64 characters or less) and

domain name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM],

[Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the server type.

When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.

2Select [OK].

"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" appears when [OK] is selected.

To add a new function, select [Yes]. The selection screen for functions displayed in the

home screen will appear.

Item Descriptions

Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list

stored in the machine.

Network

Authentication

User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property

stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login

page.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Selecting "Domain" [Add/Edit] displays the domain registration list. In the domain

registration list screen, select [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain

names can be registered.

Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 2-16)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-4

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

9-5

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.

Authentication Security

If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.

User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Authentication Security" [Next] > "User Account Lockout

Set" [Next]

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-6

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

Item Descriptions

Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout

is applied.

Value

Number of Retries until Locked:

Specify how many login retries are

allowed until the account is locked out.

(1 to 10 times)

Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be

locked out until it is unlocked.

(1 to 60 minutes)

Lockout Target: Specify the extent to which the account

lockout is applied. You can select from

[All] or [Remote Login Only]. Remote

outside the operation panel.

Locked out Users

List

Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by

selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].

NOTE

This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.

9-7

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Password Policy Settings

You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy.

Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Authentication Security" [Next] > "Password Policy Settings"

[Next]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Password Policy Select whether or not password policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Minimum password

length

Set the minimum password length of characters for password.

Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters)

Password complexity Set the password complexity.

Value

No more than two consecutive identical char: Off, On

At least one uppercase letter (A-Z): Off, On

At least one lowercase letter (a-z): Off, On

At least one number (0-9): Off, On

At least one symbol: Off, On

Maximum password

age

Set the maximum password age.

Value: Off, On (1 to 180 days)

Policy Violated User

List

List of users do not meet password policy requirements.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-8

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Adding a User (Local User List)

You can add up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name).

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local User List" [Add/Edit]

2Enter the user information.

[Add] > Enter the user information > [OK]

NOTE

By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Name

Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same

password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.

Access Level Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-9

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/

her account name, can login without entering the account ID.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

NOTE

•Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

•Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name

or account ID.

E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address

will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any

E-mail function.

ID Card

Information

Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and select [Read].

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit

is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

Local

Authorization*1

Set usage authority for each user. Local Authorization must be enabled.

Local Authorization (page 9-18)

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Copy Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Duplex Restriction:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restriction:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX TX Restriction*2:

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing Restr. in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

Storing Restr. in Memory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is

prohibited.

My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and shortcut

settings for each user. Settings registered here can be applied simply

by logging in.

Item Descriptions

9-10

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Select [Save].

A new user is added on the local user list.

*1 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.

Local Authorization (page 9-18)

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

If you selected [Send] in the Default Screen for "My Panel", select the screen to display from

[Destination], [Machine Address Book], or a registered external address book.

NOTE

If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished

asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select

[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.

For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:

Simple Login Settings (page 9-27)

9-11

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Changing User Properties

Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.

For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local User List" [Add/Edit]

2Change the user properties.

Changing user properties

1Select the user whose properties you wish to change > [Detail]

2Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

3[Save] > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

NOTE

To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.

You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the user list.

Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by name or login user name.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-12

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Deleting a user

1Select the user to delete.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

The selected user will be deleted.

Changing the user information of logged in user (User Property)

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, E-mail address,

Simple Login, and My Panel.

Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present

status.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]

2Change the user properties.

1Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

NOTE

The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

Item Description

User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters

can be entered.

characters can be entered.

Access Level Displays the user's access level.

Maximum Password

Age

Displays the term of validity of the login password.

NOTE

This function does not appear when Password Policy is set to

[Off] or the term of validity of the password is set to [Off].

E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can

be entered.

NOTE

This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On],

Group Authorization is set to [On], and Guest Authorization

Setting is set to [On].

9-13

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Select [Save].

The user information is changed.

Authorization Rules Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.

NOTE

This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On],

Group Authorization is set to [On], or Guest Authorization

Setting is set to [On].

[Job Accounting Rules] shows the account name set for the

logged in user and the usage restrictions that are set for that

account.

This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For

information on job accounting, refer to the following:

Job Accounting Access (page 9-35)

Simple Login When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.

NOTE

This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off]

or the user is not registered in Simple Login.

ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card

Authentication Kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

This function does not appear when the server type is set to

[Ext.] in Network Authentication, and logged in with the user

account certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server

type.

My Panel Register the language and default screen for each user. Once

registered, the setting will be applied simply by login. Network

users are not displayed.

Item Description

9-14

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.

Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use

the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

type the name and password for each print job.

[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed

when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a

printing is attempted.

[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will

be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login

user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each

time a printing is attempted.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the

Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the

name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with

only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user

name and password will appear.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-15

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Click [OK].

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.

2Select the machine, and click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-16

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based

on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners

and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure the settings.

1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User

Name and Password.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-17

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are

based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and

password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user

does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be

displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered

each time a transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-18

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Local Authorization

Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local Authorization" [Change]

2[Off] or [On] > [OK]

NOTE

When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-19

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] >

"Group Authorization" [Change]

2[On] > [OK]

NOTE

To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in

"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-20

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group List (Up to 20)

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] > "Group List" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[Add] > Add information on each item > [OK]

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Group ID*1 Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and

4294967295).

Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).

Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.

Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the

printer.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.

Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict. Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.

FAX Transmission*2 Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.

Storing Restr. in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document

boxes.

Storing Restr. in

Memory

Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable

memory.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-21

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

A new group is added on the group list.

*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you

are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are

using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on

the installation DVD for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

9-22

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Authorization Set.

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are

allowed to use.

Enabling Guest Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] >

"Guest Authorization" [Change]

2[On] > [OK]

NOTE

• To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login

Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

• Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be

selected when logging in.

In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use

a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the

guest properties.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-23

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Configuring Guest Property

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] > "Guest Property" [Next]

2Configure the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

The default setting is "Guest User".

Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

If the user does not belong to any account, select [Others].

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-24

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

Authorization

Rules

Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

Copy Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Duplex Restriction:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict.:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX TX Restriction*1:

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing Restr. in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

Storing Restr. in Memory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function

is prohibited.

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Item Descriptions

9-25

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail

address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of

E-mail.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Obtain NW User Property] > [On]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > Add information on each item > [OK]

NOTE

To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the

authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64

characters). If a server name is not entered, user information will

be acquired from the server set for Network Authentication.

Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389.

Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed

from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed

from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

E-mail Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the

LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Authentic at Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After

changing the setting, restart the system or turn the power off and

then on.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-26

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5

to 255 seconds).

LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security

employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off], [SSL/TLS] or

[STARTTLS].

*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server

name entered in the network authentication.

*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".

*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in

"Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is

"Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".

*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.

*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".

Item Descriptions

9-27

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Simple Login Settings

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to

use this functionality.

Enabling Simple Login

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login" [Change]

2[On] or [Off] > [OK]

NOTE

• For user registration, refer to the following:

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-28

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Simple Login Key

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login Key" [Next]

2Enter the user information.

1Select the key to which you want to register a user.

2Select [Add/Edit].

3"Display Name" [Change] > Enter the user name to be displayed > [OK]

4Select "User" [Change].

5To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,

select [Network User].

Select [Next].

The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.

Specifying the user from local users

Select the user to be set for simple login.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

•Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

•Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-29

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Specifying the user from network users

Select [Login User Name] and [Login Password], enter the information of the user to be

registered, and select [OK].

If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the

"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.

6"Password" [Change] > [On] or [Off] > [OK] > "Icon" [Change]

7Select the user icon to be displayed and select [OK].

3Register the user.

Select [Save].

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Status

User Name

Domain:

# Keys

Simple Login Key: - User

Enter login user name and password.

Cancel Back

User Name

Password

# Keys

domain 1

**********

0099

m0310502

9-30

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

ID Card Settings

If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "ID Card Settings" [Next]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

This function does not appear when the user logs in as a network authentication user.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Keyboard Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Additional

Authentication*1

*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in

"Network Authentication".

Select whether or not to require password entry after

authenticating by ID card.

Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN Code

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-31

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

PIN Code Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "PIN Code Authorization" [Change]

2[Off] or [On] > [OK]

NOTE

When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for

server type.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-32

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration

Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use

this machine.

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login

password entry screen.

9-33

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting

Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each

account.

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs

Printed from a PC

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the

printer driver on the PC.

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-41)

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-42)

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver

on the PC.

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-43)

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

100 400 200

A: 00000001

1Enable job

accounting.

(page 9-34)

3Enter the assigned account

ID when performing the job.

(page 9-32)

4Count the number of pages

copied, printed, scanned and

faxed.

2Setting an account.

(page 9-36)

A: 00000001

B: 00000002

C: 00000003

100 400 200

1Set Job Accounting for the

PC on the network by

using the printer driver.

(page 9-40)

2Execute printing.

3Count the number of

pages printed.

9-34

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Enabling Job Accounting

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To disable job accounting, select [Off].

• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed

and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the

Account ID.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-35

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Job Accounting Access

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Access]

2Configure the settings.

[Local] or [Network] > [OK]

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected

for server type.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-36

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting (Local)

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.

Adding an Account

Up to 1000 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"

[Add/Edit] > [Add]

2Enter the account information.

1"Account Name" [Change] > Enter the account name > [OK]

2"Account ID" [Change] > Enter the account ID > [OK]

3Activate or deactivate restriction.

4Select [Save].

A new account is added on the Account List.

Item Descriptions

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-37)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-37)

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-37

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".

Copy/Printer Count (page 9-51)

Restriction Items

"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count "Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count

"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in the following modes:

Item Descriptions

Copy Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.

Print Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the

optional FAX Kit is installed.

FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX

Kits are installed.

Item Descriptions

Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products

with the fax function installed.

FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX

Kits are installed.

IMPORTANT

Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the "FAX Port Restriction" setting.

Item Descriptions

Off No restriction is applied.

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

9-38

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Editing an Account

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"

[Add/Edit]

2Edit an account.

1Select [Detail] for the account name you wish to edit.

2Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.

3[Save] > [Yes]

The account information is changed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

•Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

•Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-39

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Deleting an Account

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] >

"Accounting List" [Add/Edit]

2Delete an account.

1Select the account name you wish to delete.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

The account is deleted.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-40

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by

using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.

2Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]:

Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the

entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID

for each print job.

[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be

displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to

be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID

to be used needs to be selected from the list.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows

user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is

registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will

appear.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-41

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

3Click [OK].

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the

TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Click

[TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list then the TWAIN Driver Setting screen appears.

2Select the machine, click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then

[TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-42

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA

Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Scanner" in the search box. Click [View scanners

and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and

File Search]. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-43

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer

The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using

the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select

[Printing preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the

same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

enter the Account ID for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is

attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-44

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Configuring Job Accounting

Default Setting

Select the default value for usage limit, and whether or not to enable counting by paper size.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting"

[Next] > "Default Counter Limit" [Next]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Change] for the item you want to modify and then select [+], [-] or use the numeric

keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets.

2Select [OK].

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Description

Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default

restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any

number from 1 to 9,999,999.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether

[Individual] or [Total] is selected for [Copy/Print Count].

Copy/Printer Count (page 9-51)

[Individual] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Copy Restriction

(Total)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

copying.

Print Restriction

(Total)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Scan Restriction

(Others)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

scanning (excludes copying).

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-45

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Count by Paper Size

This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).

In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not

specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media

type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2"Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting" [Next] > "Count by Paper Size" [Next] >

"Paper Size 1 (to 5)" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [On].

2Select the paper size.

3Select [Media Type] to specify media type.

4Select the media type and select [OK].

FAX TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

sending faxes.

[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Print Restriction

(Total)

Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets

used for copying and printing.

Scan Restriction

(Others)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

scanning (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restriction*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

sending faxes.

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

NOTE

Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Description

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-46

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

5Select [OK].

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A

new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2"Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Total Job Accounting" [Next] or "Each Job Accounting"

[Check]

2Configure the settings.

The table below lists the item you can view.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total

number of pages used. You can also use [FAX]*1, [Count by

Paper Size], [by Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the

number of pages used.

Copy (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white

copying.

Printer (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white

printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print Report

• Print from PC

Copy/Printer (B/W) Displays the total number of pages used for black-and-white

copying and printing.

FAX*1 Displays the number of pages received.

Total Displays the total number of pages used.

Count by Paper Size Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size

as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-47

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Total Accounting

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

1Check the number of pages.

1 Select [Check] at the function to check the count.

The results will be displayed.

2 Confirm the count and select [Close].

Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job

Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.

1Check the number of pages.

1 Select the account to check the count.

2 Select [Detail].

3Select [Check] at the function to check the count.

The results will be displayed.

4Confirm the count and select [Close].

Count by Duplex/

Combine

Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode,

Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the

pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode,

Combine (4in1) mode and the total for all three.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and

other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.

FAX TX Pages*1 Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX TX Time*1 Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.

Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

NOTE

•Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account names.

•Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID. To

display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account].

Item Descriptions

9-48

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1Prepare paper.

Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings]

3Print the report.

[Print Accounting Report] > [Yes]

Accounting report is printed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

ACCOUNT. REPORT

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-49

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting

Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

1In the account ID entry screen, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select

[Login].

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the

account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.

2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID

again.

• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound

and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.

• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the

number of pages scanned.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-8)

9-50

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Apply Limit

Apply Limit

This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below

describes the action taken.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2Select "Apply Limit" [Change].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only] > [OK]

Item Descriptions

Immediately*1

*1 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will

be rejected.

Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-51

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Copy/Printer Count

Copy/Printer Count

You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and

printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to the

following:

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-37)

Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 9-46)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-48)

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2Select "Copy/Printer Count" [Change].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Total] or [Individual] > [OK]

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-52

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User

The setting items are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Unknown User Setting" [Next] > [Unknown ID Job].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Permit] or [Reject].

Item Descriptions

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

9-53

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown

If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job

History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Unknown User Setting" [Next] > [User Property].

2Enter the user information.

Enter the user information > [OK]

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Account Name Register an account for a user whose ID is unknown.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-33)

NOTE

• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

• Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account

name or account ID.

Authorization Rules Set usage authority.

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from PC

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Regular Maintenance .................................. 10-2

Cleaning ............................................ 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ...................... 10-2

Cleaning inside of the Document

Processor .......................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Glass ........................... 10-3

Toner Container Replacement .......... 10-4

Replace the Waste Toner Box .......... 10-7

Loading Paper .................................. 10-9

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet

Finisher) .......................................... 10-10

Replacing Staples (3,000-Sheet

Finisher) ........................................... 10-11

Disposing of the Punch Waste ........ 10-13

Troubleshooting ........................................ 10-16

Solving Malfunctions ....................... 10-16

Machine Operation Trouble ............ 10-16

Printed Image Trouble .................... 10-20

Remote Operation .......................... 10-23

Responding to Messages ............... 10-25

Adjustment/Maintenance .......................... 10-41

Overview of Adjustment/

Maintenance ................................... 10-41

Tone Curve Adjustment .................. 10-41

Drum Refresh 1 .............................. 10-42

Drum Refresh 2 .............................. 10-43

Clearing Paper Jams ................................ 10-44

Jam Location Indicators .................. 10-44

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 1 ....................................... 10-45

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 2 ....................................... 10-47

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 3 (500-sheet×2) ............... 10-49

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-51

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 4 (500-sheet×2) ............... 10-52

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-54

Remove any jammed paper in the

Multipurpose Tray ........................... 10-57

Remove any jammed paper in

Duplex Unit ..................................... 10-58

Remove any jammed paper in Inner

Tray / Fixing Unit ............................. 10-60

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 2 ........................................... 10-62

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 3 (500-sheet×2/

1,500-sheet×2) ................................ 10-63

Remove any jammed paper in the

Bridge Unit ...................................... 10-64

Remove any jammed paper in the

Mailbox ........................................... 10-65

Remove any jammed paper in the

Document Processor (DP-7100) ..... 10-66

Remove any jammed paper in the

Document Processor (DP-7120) ..... 10-68

Remove any jammed paper in the

Document Processor (DP-7110) ..... 10-70

Remove any jammed paper in the

1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................... 10-72

Remove any jammed paper in the

3,000-Sheet Finisher (Inner) ........... 10-75

Remove any jammed paper in the

3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray A) ......... 10-76

Remove any jammed paper in the

3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray B) ......... 10-80

Clearing a Staple Jam ............................... 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-

Sheet Finisher ................................. 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 3,000-

Sheet Finisher ................................. 10-86

10-2

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Regular Maintenance

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.

Cleaning Glass Platen

Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth

dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor

When using the document processor that features dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit with the supplied

cleaning cloth.

1Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.

CAUTION

For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

10-3

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Clean inside of the document processor.

Cleaning Slit Glass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the supplied cleaning cloth.

1Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.

2Clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide.

IMPORTANT

Clean the slit glass surface with the supplied cleaning cloth.

NOTE

Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.

10-4

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Toner Container Replacement

When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed.

"Toner is empty."

When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for

replacement.

"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"

1Open the front cover.

2Unlock the toner container lever.

3Remove the toner container.

NOTE

• We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing, to

maintain quality.

• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer

convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new

products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is

only used anonymously for the above purposes.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-5

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.

5Remove the new toner container from the box.

6Tap the toner container.

7Shake the toner container.

8Install the toner container.

5 ~ 6

5~6

5 ~ 6 5 ~ 6

5~6

5 ~ 6

5~6

5 ~ 6 5 ~ 6

5~6

5 ~ 6

5~6

5 ~ 6

10-6

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

9Remove the new Waste Toner Box.

10 Place the Waste Toner Box in the spare waste toner box tray

(W1).

11 Close the front cover.

NOTE

• If the toner container cover or front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.

• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

10-7

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replace the Waste Toner Box

When the waste toner box is full, the following message will be displayed. Immediately replace the waste toner box.

"Check waste toner box."

1Open the front cover.

2Remove the Waste Toner Box.

3Put used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.

4Remove the new Waste Toner Box.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

5Open the cap of the new Waste Toner Box.

6Install the Waste Toner Box.

7Close the front cover.

NOTE

Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

10-9

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Loading Paper

When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.

"Add paper in cassette #."

"Add paper in Multipurpose tray."

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-7)

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-6)

NOTE

If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a

new paper is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-7)

MP Tray Setting (page 8-8)

10-10

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

3Replace the staples.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-11

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

5Close the cover.

Replacing Staples (3,000-Sheet Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the finisher front cover.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-12

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

3Replace the staples.

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

5Close the cover.

10-13

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Disposing of the Punch Waste

When the waste punch box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the punch waste box.

"Empty the punch waste box."

Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.

1,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the container.

10-14

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

5Close the cover.

3,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

10-15

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

5Close the cover.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the container.

10-16

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-18)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

An application does not

start.

Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30

seconds or more.

page 8-71

The screen does not

respond when the power

switch is turned on.

Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power

cord securely.

―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. page 2-2

Pressing the [Start] key

does not produce copies.

Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response

to the message and respond

accordingly.

page 10-25

Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the

platen, place them face-down and

align them with the original size

indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the

document processor, place them

face-up.

page 5-3

―Check that the settings of the

application software.

―

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper of the supported type?

Is it in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

page 3-4

Is the paper curled, folded or

wrinkled?

Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Are there any loose scraps or

jammed paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. page 10-44

10-17

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2 or more sheets are

overlaps when ejected.

(multi feed)

―Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printouts are curled. ―Turn the paper over in the cassette,

or turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printer driver cannot be

installed.

Is the driver installed with the host

name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct

function is available?

Specify the IP address instead of

the host name.

page 2-47

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC

outlet.

―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. page 2-2

Are the printer cable and network

cable connected?

Connect the correct printer cable

and network cable securely.

page 2-7

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-11

When the wired or Wi-Fi network is

configured using the name

resolution, does the IP address

(private address) of the other

network which can not access

coexists?

The number of host name and

domain name which can be used

with the machine is one

respectively. Configure the network

under this restriction.

―

Change the settings of name

resolution such as NetBEUI and

DNS, or network environment

settings.

Command

Center RX

User

Guide

Select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or

Optional Network as an unlimited-

use network on Primary Network

(Client).

page 8-63

Set to [Wired] or [Wi-Fi] either one

of [On], and set the other setting to

[Off].

page 8-54

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-18

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot print with USB

memory.

USB memory not

recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

page 8-64

―Check that the USB memory is

securely plugged into the machine.

―

While "Auto-IP" is already

set to [On], the IP

address is not assigned

automatically.

Is a value other than "0.0.0.0"

entered for the link local address of

TCP/IP(v4)?

Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of

TCP/IP(v4).

page 2-30

Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable

securely.

page 2-7

Have the network settings for the

equipment been configured

properly?

Configure the TCP/IP settings

properly.

page 8-47

Have the folder sharing settings

been configured properly?

Check sharing settings and access

privileges under the folder

properties.

page 3-15

Is the selected interface selected as

the Primary Network?

Specify the host name or IP address

of the interface selected as the

Primary Network, or set the

interface to be used again.

page 8-63

Has the SMB protocol been set to

[On]?

Set the SMB protocol setting to

[On].

page 8-54

Has [Host Name] been entered

properly? *1

Check the name of the computer to

which data is being sent.

page 5-23

Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the

shared folder.

page 5-23

Has [Login User Name] been

entered properly? *1 *2

Check the domain name and login

user name.

page 5-23

Has the same domain name been

used for [Host Name] and [Login

User Name]?

Delete the domain name and

backslash ("/") from [Login User

Name].

page 5-23

Has [Login Password] been

entered properly?

Check the login password. page 5-23

Have exceptions for Windows

Firewall been configured properly?

Configure exceptions for Windows

Firewall properly.

page 3-18

Do the time settings for the

equipment, domain server, and data

destination computer differ?

Set the equipment, domain server,

and data destination computer to

the same time.

―

Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error.page 10-37

Cannot connect to this

machine by using Wi-Fi

Direct.

Are three handheld devices

connected simultaneously?

Release the connection of handheld

devices being connected manually

or set a connection after setting the

connection time and releasing the

connection by automatic

disconnection.

page 8-49

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-19

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot send via the

e-mail.

Is the E-mail send size limit set in

the SMTP server registered on the

machine?

Check the limit value is entered to

"E-mail Size Limit" of [E-mail]

setting in Command Center RX and

change the value as necessary.

page 2-65

The machine is emitting

steam in the area around

the paper ejection slot.

Check the room temperature to see

if it is low, or if damp paper was

used.

Depending on the printing

environment and the paper's

condition, the heat generated during

printing will cause the moisture in

the paper to evaporate, and the

steam emitted may look like smoke.

This is not a problem, and you can

continue printing. If the steam

concerns you, raise the room

temperature, or replace the paper

with a newer, dryer paper.

―

Cannot create

Searchable PDF file.

Is the proper language selected? Check the language to extract. page 6-69

Can the texts on the original not be

recognized as texts, or is the PDF

creation time taken?

Check the following:

• The original orientation is

correct.

• When setting the originals with

the mixed orientation at once,

[On] is selected for [Auto Image

Rotation].

page 6-69

Cannot search a text that

you want to search on the

PDF file.

Have you set [OCR Text

Recognition] in [File Format]?

Set [OCR Text Recognition] in

[File Format].

page 6-69

Are the texts of the scanned original

fainted or too light?

Set [Density] to darker level. page 6-29

Is the background of the scanned

original too dark and the texts are

difficult to recognize?

Set [Background Density Adj.] to

[On] or [Manual] and manually

adjust the density lighter. Otherwise,

set [Density] to darker level.

page 6-29

page 6-32

Is the text or image on the back of

the original visible on the front?

Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to

[On].

page 6-32

Cannot find the machine

with WSD.

Did you search by specifying the

machine’s IP address or host

name?

For security reasons, [HTTP]

protocol is set to [Off], and therefore

you cannot search by IP address or

host name.

―

The machine makes a

clicking sound before

starting to print or after

printing.

―The machine is adjusting itself. It is

not a machine failure.

―

*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).

*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:

Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)

User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-20

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Printed images are totally

too light.

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-29

page 8-74

Is the toner distributed evenly within

the toner container?

Shake the toner container from side

to side several times.

page 10-4

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-19

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-15

―Run [Drum Refresh 1]. page 10-42

Printed images are too

dark even though the

background of the

scanned original is white.

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-29

page 8-74

―Run [Drum Refresh 1]. page 10-42

Copies have a moire

pattern (dots grouped

together in patterns and

not aligned uniformly).

Is the original a printed photograph? Set the original image to

[Printer Output] or [Book/

Magazine] in [Photo].

page 6-29

―When making copies

Select [-1] to [-3] in [Sharpness].

page 6-31

―When making copies

Set [DP Read Action] to [Quality

Priority].

page 6-65

Texts are not clearly

printed.

Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-29

―When making copies

Select [-1] to [-3] in [Sharpness].

page 6-31

Black dots appear on the

white background.

Is the original holder or the glass

platen dirty?

Clean the original holder or the

glass platen.

page 10-2

―Run [Drum Refresh 1]. page 10-42

10-21

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed images are fuzzy.

Printed images are cut

off.

Is the machine being used in

conditions of very humid, or

humidity or temperature rapidly

changes?

Use in an environment that has

suitable humidity.

―

―Run [Drum Refresh 1]. page 10-42

Printed images are

skewed.

Are the originals placed correctly?

When placing originals on the platen,

align them with the original size

indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the

document processor, align the

original width guides securely before

placing the originals.

page 5-3

Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper

width guides.

page 3-4

―Perform center line adjustment. For

more information about how to do

so, contact your service

representative.

―

Irregular horizontal lines

appear in the image.

―Contact your service representative. ―

Printed images

have

vertical lines.

Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3

Dirt on the top edge or

back of the paper.

Check the machine interior. Open the right cover. If the machine

interior is dirty with toner, clean it

using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-22

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

―Open and then close the right cover. ―

―Run [Drum Refresh 1]. page 10-42

The previous image

remains and lightly

printed.

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-15

Print on the back of the

sheet is visible on the

front.

―Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to

[On].

page 6-32

page 8-18

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-23

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Remote Operation

This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by

accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.

Executing Remote Operation from Browser

The supported Browser is as follows. We recommend the latest version of browser to use Remote Operation.

• Google Chrome (Version 21.0 or later)

• Internet Explorer (Version 9.0 or later)

•Microsoft Edge

• Mozilla Firefox (Version 14.0 or later)

• Safari (Version 5.0 or later)

This procedure explains how to execute Remote Operation from Command Center RX using Google Chrome.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]

2Set "Enhanced VNC over SSL" to [On].

3Configure settings for remote operation.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Operation] > [Change] >

[On]

2Select [Off], [Use Password], or [Administrator Only].

When you select [Use Password], enter the password in "Password" and "Confirm

Password", then select [OK].

4Restart the machine.

NOTE

To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

NOTE

You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Remote Operation (page 8-68)

NOTE

You can configure settings for remote operation using Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

Restart Entire Device (page 8-67)

10-24

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

5Start up the browser.

Enter "https://" and host name of the machine to access the Command Center RX.

6Select [Device Information/Remote Operation] > [Remote

Operation].

7Click [Start] button.

When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the

system administrator's or user's PC screen.

Executing Remote Operation from VNC Software

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]

2Set "Enhanced VNC (RFB)" to [On].

3Startup the remote operation.

1Start up the VNC software.

2Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.

"IP address: port number"

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-62)

NOTE

• If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed

on the operation panel. Select [Yes].

• If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation,

select Always allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click Done. Perform Remote

Operation after waiting 1 minute or more.

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

NOTE

• When setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL" to [On], the communication is encrypted.

• You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

When setting "VNC (RFB)" to [On] in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When

setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL " to [On], the default port number is 9063.

Protocol Settings (page 8-54)

10-25

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-18)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Acceptable staple

count exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Is the acceptable number of

sheets exceeded?

Select [Continue] to print

without using Staple. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Access point was not

detected.

―Check if the access point has

been set correctly.

—

Activation error. ―Failed to activate the

application. Contact

administrator.

―

―Expansion Authentication is

disabled. Turn the power switch

off and on. If the error exists,

contact administrator.

―

Add paper in cassette

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 3-2

Add paper in

Multipurpose tray.

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multipurpose tray?

Load paper.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 5-6

Adjusting Scanner. — The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

10-26

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Box is not found. — The specified box cannot be

found. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Box limit exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Is [End] displayed on the

screen?

The specified box is full, and no

further storage is available. Job

is canceled. Select [End]. Try to

perform the job again after

printing or deleting data from the

box.

—

— Repeat Copy box is full, and no

further repeat copy is available.

Select [Continue] to print

scanned pages. Select [Cancel]

to cancel the job.

—

Broadcast error. — An error has occurred during

broadcast transmission. The job

is canceled. Select [End].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Cannot connect. — This appears when the Wi-Fi or

Wi-Fi Direct connection did not

complete. Check the settings,

and check the signal conditions.

page 8-49

page 8-50

Cannot connect to

Authentication

Server.*1

— Set machine time to match the

server’s time.

page 2-29

— Check the domain name. page 9-2

— Check the host name. page 9-2

— Check the connection status

with the server.

—

Cannot connect to

Server.

— Check the connection status

with the server.

—

Cannot duplex print

on this paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, duplex is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-44

10-27

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot find the

destination computer.

Check the computer.

Is the machine and the PC to

which the scanned image is to

be sent connected to the

network?

Check the network and SMB

settings.

• The network cable is

connected.

• The hub is not operating

properly.

• The server is not operating

properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

page 2-6

Is the account information (user

ID, password) used to access

the shared folder to which the

scanned image is to be sent

incorrect?

Check the following settings of

the PC to which the scanned

image is to be sent.

•Host name

•Path

• Login user name

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user,

specify the domain name.

[Login User ID]@[Domain

Name]

Example: sa720XXXX@km

• Login password

• Folder share permissions of

the recipient

—

Cannot offset this

paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be offset?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, offset is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-24

Cannot perform

remote printing.

— Remote printing is prohibited.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 8-30

Cannot print the

specified number of

copies.*1

— Only one copy is available.

Select [Continue] to continue

printing. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

—

Cannot process this

job.*1

―Restricted by Authorization

settings. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

―

―Restricted by Job Accounting.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-34

Cannot punch at the

specified position.

Have you selected a position

that cannot be punched?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, punch is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-26

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-28

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot punch this

paper.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be punched?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, punch is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-26

Cannot read data in

this ID card.

―In registration process, the ID

card information was not read

correctly. Hold again the ID card

over the ID card reading part.

If the same message still

appears, the ID card may not be

compatible with this product.

Change it to another ID card.

―

Cannot recognize. ―Make sure your ID card has

been registered.

―

Cannot staple at the

specified position.

Have you selected a position

that cannot be stapled?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, staple is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-25

Cannot staple this

paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be stapled?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, staple is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-25

Cannot use ##### due

to a failure.

―Call service. ―

Check the document

processor.

Is the top cover of the document

processor open?

Close the document processor

cover.

―

Is the document processor

open?

Close the document processor. ―

Check the paper in the

multipurpose tray.

— The paper size is different. Set

selected size paper and select

[Continue].

page 5-6

Check the toner

container.

— Open the main unit front cover

and remove the toner container.

Shake carefully and replace.

―

Check waste toner

box.

— The waste toner box is not

installed correctly. Set it

correctly.

―

Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-7

Confidential

document was

detected.

— The machine detects the

document guard pattern. Job is

canceled. Select [End].

―

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-29

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Empty the punch

waste box.

Is the punch waste box full? Follow the instructions on the

screen. and empty the punch

waste box.

page 10-13

Error occurred at

cassette #.

―Open the cassette. Check inside

the machine and remove the

paper.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to specify Job

Accounting.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

— Failed to specify Job Accounting

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Failed to store job

retention data.

— The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

FAX box limit

exceeded.

— Follow the instructions on the

screen and delete documents

from the FAX box to make room

for FAX reception.

To check the canceled job,

select the [Status/Job Cancel]

key and then [Printing Jobs] to

check receipt result.

FAX

Operation

Guide

Finisher tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

10-30

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Hard Disk error. — An error has occurred on the

hard disk. Job is canceled.

Select [End].

The possible error codes and

their descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, divide the file

into smaller files.

If the error occurs after the file is

divided, the hard disk is

damaged. Execute [System

Initialization].

04: Insufficient space on the

hard disk to complete this

operation. Move data or delete

unneeded data.

—

Hard disk failure. Call

service.

— Call service. —

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account

ID.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

— The account ID was incorrect

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Incorrect box

password.

— The box password was incorrect

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password.*1

— The login user name or

password was incorrect when

processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Install the punch

waste box.

— Follow the instructions on the

screen. and install the punch

waste box.

page 10-13

10-31

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting

restriction

exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by

Job Accounting. Cannot print

any more. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Job separator tray is

full of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper and select

[Continue]. Printing then

resumes.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error. *1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

―PostScript error has occurred.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. — Internal error has occurred.

Make a note of the error code

displayed on the screen. Call

service.

—

Mailbox tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Main unit inner tray is

full of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Maximum number of

scanned pages.

Is the acceptable scanning

count exceeded?

Cannot scan pages any more.

Follow the instructions on the

screen.

—

10-32

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Memory is full.*1 — The memory is full and the job

cannot be continued. Select

[Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

When insufficient memory

occurred frequently, contact

your dealer or service

representative.

—

— The process cannot be

performed due to insufficient

memory. If only [End] is

available, select [End]. The job

will be canceled.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Non-genuine toner

installed.

Is the installed toner container

our own brand?

We will not be liable for any

damage caused by the use of

third party supplies in this

machine.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper jam. ―If a paper jam occurs, the

machine will stop and the

location of the jam will be

indicated on the screen. Leave

the machine on and follow the

instructions to remove the

jammed paper.

page 10-44

Paper left. — Remove paper from the

document finisher.

—

— Remove paper from the finisher

tray.

—

Perform Tone Curve

Adjustment in the

System Menu.

Over long periods of use, the

effects of the ambient

temperature and humidity can

cause output hues to vary

slightly.

Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. page 10-41

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-33

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Performing Drum

Refresh...

— The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

Preparing to print. — The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Regulating the

temperature…

―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

―

Removable memory

error.*1

Is writing to a removable

memory prohibited?

An error occurred in the

removable memory. The job

stopped. Select [End].

The possible error codes and

their descriptions are as follows.

01: Connect a removable

memory that can be written to.

―

―An error occurred in the

removable memory. The job

stopped. Select [End].

The possible error codes and

their descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, the removable

memory is not compatible with

the machine. Use the removable

memory formatted by this

machine. If the removable

memory cannot be formatted, it

is damaged. Connect a

compatible removable memory.

page 5-64

Removable Memory is

full.*1

―The job is canceled. Select

[End].

Insufficient free space in the

removable memory. Delete

unneeded files.

―

Remove originals in

the document

processor.

Are there any originals left in the

document processor?

Remove originals from the

document processor.

page 10-66

page 10-68

page 10-70

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-34

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Replace all originals

and press [Continue].

— Remove originals from the

document processor, put them

back in their original order, and

place them again. Select

[Continue] to resume printing.

Select [Cancel] to cancel the

job.

—

Running security

function...

— Running security function.

Please wait.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Scanner memory is

full.*1

— Scanning cannot be performed

due to insufficient memory of the

scanner. Follow the instructions

on the screen.

—

Scheduled sending

jobs exceeded.

— The number of jobs has

exceeded the limit set for

delayed transmission. Select

[End]. The job is canceled.

Wait until the delayed

transmission is executed, or

cancel the delayed transmission

and then perform the job again.

—

Send Error.*1 — An error has occurred during

transmission. The job is

canceled. Select [End]. Refer to

Responding to Send Error for

the error code and corrective

actions.

page 10-37

Staple is empty. *1 Has the staple cartridge holder

run out of staples?

If the staples are depleted, the

machine will stop and the

location of staple depletion will

be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and

follow the instructions to replace

the staple case. Select

[Continue] to print without

stapling. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

page 10-10

page 10-11

Staple is empty.

(Manual Staple)

Has staple cartridge holder A

run out of staples?

Add staples to staple cartridge

holder A.

page 10-11

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-35

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the

machine will stop and the

location of the jam will be

indicated on the screen. Leave

the machine on and follow the

instructions to remove the

jammed staple.

page 10-83

System error. — System error has occurred.

Follow the instructions on the

screen.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-70)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The cover is open. Is there any cover which is

open?

Close the cover indicated on the

screen.

―

The device cannot be

connected because

allowed connections

would be exceeded.

―Cancel a connection to a

portable device that is not being

used, or set the machine’s auto

disconnect time to break

portable device connections.

page 8-49

The password does

not meet password

policy.

Is the password expired? Change the login password.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-7

page 9-8

Is the password policy

requirement (such as password

length or required characters)

changed?

Confirm the password policy

requirements and change the

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-7

page 9-8

The phone receiver is

off the hook.

―Put down the receiver. ―

The removable

memory is not

formatted.

Is the removable memory

formatted by this machine?

Perform [Format] on this

machine.

―

The slit glass requires

cleaning.

— Clean the slit glass using the

cleaning cloth supplied with the

document processor.

page 10-3

This ID card is already

registered to another

user.

— Your ID card has already been

registered. Change it to another

ID card.

—

This user account is

locked out.

— Contact administrator.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-36

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Time for maintenance

soon. #####

— Call service. —

Toner container is not

installed.

— Install the toner container. —

Toner is empty. — Replace the toner container. page 10-4

Toner is low. (Replace

when empty.)

— It is almost time to replace the

toner container. Obtain a new

toner container.

—

Tray # is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Is the paper curled? Check the checkpoints of

"Printouts are curled." in Solving

Malfunctions and take the

corrective actions.

page 10-17

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Unknown Toner

Installed. PC

Does the installed toner

container's regional

specification match the

machine's?

Install the specified container. —

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Warning for high

temperature. Adjust

the room temperature.

―Print quality may be

deteriorated. Adjust the

temperature and the humidity of

your room.

―

Warning for low

temperature. Adjust

the room temperature.

— Print quality may be

deteriorated. Adjust the

temperature and the humidity of

your room.

—

Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again

later.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

You cannot use this

box.

— You cannot use the specified

box. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-37

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Send Error

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

1101 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the host name of the SMTP server on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-65

Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-26

Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-23

1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the

domain name.

•Host name

•Path

page 5-23

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center

RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

• E-mail size limit

page 2-65

Failed to send i-FAX. Check the following on the Command Center

RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

Refer to

FAX

Operation

Guide

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the

domain name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-26

1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the

domain name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-23

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-26

10-38

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you

cannot send the email.

page 5-22

Failed to send i-FAX. Check the i-FAX address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you

cannot send the email.

Refer to

FAX

Operation

Guide

1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/

Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >

[Protocol Detail] > [SMB Client

(Transmission)]

page 8-47

Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-65

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/

Network] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >

[Protocol Detail] > [FTP Client

(Transmission)]

page 8-47

Failed to send i-FAX. Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-65

1106 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the sender address of SMTP on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-65

1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/

Network] > [Network] > [Secure Protocol] >

[SSL]

page 8-58

1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.

• Is SMTP over SSL available?

• Is the encryption available?

Refer to the

Command

Center RX

User

Guide.

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTPS available?

• Is the encryption available?

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-39

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the network and Command Center RX.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• POP3 server name of the POP3 user

• SMTP server name

page 2-65

2102

2103

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTP available?

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2201

2202

2203

2231

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2204 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings

on the Command Center RX.

page 2-65

3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the

sender and the recipient.

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-40

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

3201 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Check the SMTP user authentication method of

the recipient.

—

0007

4201

4701

5101

5102

5103

5104

7101

7102

7103

720f

— Turn the power switch off and back on. If this

error occurs several times, make a note of the

displayed error code and contact your service

representative.

page 2-9

9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable

number of pages of 999. Send the excess pages

separately.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-41

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjustment/Maintenance

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance

If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/

Maintenance in the system menu.

The table below lists the item you can carry out.

Tone Curve Adjustment

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed output tone may differ from

the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone.

A total of 2 pattern pages (No. 1 and 2) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially during

the adjustment.

1Load paper.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Tone Curve Adjustment"

[Next]

Item Description Reference Page

Tone Curve Adjustment When the printed output tone may differ from the original, perform

this function to ensure consistency with the original tone.

page 10-41

Drum Refresh 1 Remove image blur from the printout. page 10-42

Drum Refresh 2 Remove white spots from the printout. page 10-43

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

10-42

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

3Adjust the tone curve.

1Select [Start]. A pattern is printed.

Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.

2As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with

the arrows toward the back.

3Select [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second pattern is output.

4Check that the number "2" is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2 to 3 to

read pattern 2.

5Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.

Drum Refresh 1

Remove image blur from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Drum Refresh 1" [Next]

2Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh 1" begins.

NOTE

Drum Refresh 1 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh 1 after the printing is done.

10-43

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Drum Refresh 2

Remove white dots from the printout.

1Load paper.

Load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multipurpose tray.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Drum Refresh 2" [Next]

3Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh 2" begins.

NOTE

Drum Refresh 2 cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh 2 after the printing is done.

NOTE

When you run [Drum Refresh 2], the machine sometimes makes a vibrating sound for

about 80 seconds until drum refreshing is completed. The toner soiling on the ejected paper

is normal and does not indicate a fault.

10-44

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, printing stops and the location at which the paper jam has occurred and the following message

appear on the touch panel.

"Paper Jam."

Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.

Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Shows the previous step.

3 Shows the next step.

4 Shows the removal procedure.

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

ACassette 1 page 10-45

BCassette 2 page 10-47

≧ἣ

JAM

Paper jam.

1/8

1. Open right cover 1 and

remove the paper.

2. Open cassette 1.

3. Remove the paper.

To remove paper which is difficult

to get access to, the cassette

can be removed.

4. Set the cassette

and close the cover.

e011001

≧ἣ

JAM

Paper jam.

1/8

1. Open right cover 1 and

remove the paper.

2. Open cassette 1.

3. Remove the paper.

To remove paper which is difficult

to get access to, the cassette

can be removed.

4. Set the cassette

and close the cover.

e011001

10-45

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes

with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1

1Open Right Cover 1.

CCassette 3 (500-sheet×2) page 10-49

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×1) page 10-51

DCassette 4 (500-sheet×2) page 10-49

ECassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) page 10-54

FMultipurpose Tray page 10-57

GDuplex Unit page 10-58

HInner Tray / Fixing Unit page 10-60

IRight Cover 2 page 10-62

JRight Cover 3 page 10-63

KBridge Unit page 10-64

LMailbox page 10-65

MDocument Processor page 10-66

page 10-68

page 10-70

N1,000-Sheet Finisher page 10-72

O3,000-Sheet Finisher (Inner) page 10-75

P3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray A) page 10-76

Q3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray B) page 10-80

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

10-46

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

NOTE

The cassette can be removed.

10-47

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5Push Right Cover 1 and Cassette 1 back in.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-48

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 2 back in.

NOTE

The cassette can be removed.

10-49

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3

(500-sheet×2)

See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-50

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

NOTE

The cassette can be removed.

10-51

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3

(1,500-sheet×2)

1Open Right Cover 3.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-52

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Push Right Cover 3 and Cassette 3 back in.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4

(500-sheet×2)

See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.

1Open Right Cover 3.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-53

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Pull Cassette 4 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

NOTE

The cassette can be removed.

10-54

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5Push Right Cover 3 and Cassette 4 back in.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4

(1,500-sheet×2)

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-55

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

4Pull Cassette 4 out toward you until it stops.

5Pull out paper feed unit (B1).

6Open cover (B2).

10-56

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Remove any jammed paper.

8Push paper feed unit, Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 back in.

9Return the cover to the original position.

10-57

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Remove all the paper.

3Reload the paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-58

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Duplex Unit

1Open Right Cover 1.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Open the fuser cover (a).

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-59

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Lift the duplex unit.

6Remove any jammed paper.

7Remove any paper from the paper ejection.

10-60

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Return the cover to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Inner Tray / Fixing Unit

1Open Right Cover 1.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-61

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Open the fuser cover (a).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Remove any paper from the paper ejection.

6Return the cover to the original position.

10-62

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Return the cover to the original position.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-63

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3

(500-sheet×2/1,500-sheet×2)

1Open Right Cover 3.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Return the cover to the original position.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-64

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit

1 Open the bridge unit cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-65

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox

1Open the mailbox cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-66

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (DP-7100)

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the document processor cover.

3Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-67

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Open reverse unit (C2) and remove any jammed paper.

5Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.

6Return the cover to the original position.

10-68

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (DP-7120)

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the document processor cover.

3Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-69

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Open reverse unit (C2) and remove any jammed paper.

5Turn dial (C1) to remove any jammed paper.

6Return the cover to the original position.

10-70

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor (DP-7110)

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the document processor cover.

3Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-71

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Turn dial (C) to remove any jammed paper.

5Return the cover to the original position.

10-72

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet

Finisher

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the finisher top cover.

3Open the conveyor guide (D2).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-73

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

6Open the finisher front cover.

7Open the conveyor guide (D1).

10-74

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10 Return the covers to the original position.

10-75

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 3,000-Sheet

Finisher (Inner)

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Open the conveyor guide (D1).

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-76

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

5Return the cover to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the 3,000-Sheet

Finisher (Tray A)

1Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-77

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Open the finisher front cover.

3Open the conveyor guide (D6).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D6) to the original position.

10-78

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

6Open the conveyor guide (D4).

7Turn knob (D5).

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.

10-79

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

10 Open the conveyor guide (D1).

11 Remove any jammed paper.

12 Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

13 Return the cover to the original position.

10-80

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 3,000-Sheet

Finisher (Tray B)

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the finisher front cover.

3Open the conveyor guide (D2).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-81

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Turn knob (D3).

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

7Open the conveyor guide (D1).

10-82

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10 Return the cover to the original position.

10-83

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher top cover.

2Open the conveyor guide (D2).

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

10-84

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

5Open the finisher front cover.

6Open the conveyor guide (D1).

7Remove any jammed paper.

10-85

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

8Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

9Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

10 Remove the jammed staple.

11 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

10-86

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

12 Return the covers to the original position.

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 3,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Open the conveyor guide (D4).

3Turn knob (D5).

10-87

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.

6Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

7Remove the jammed staple.

10-88

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

8Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

9Return the cover to the original position.

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-7

Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-7

Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-8

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-9

Entry Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 11-9

Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-11

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-12

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-12

Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-13

Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-15

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-19

Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-19

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-21

Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-22

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-22

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-23

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................................................ 11-23

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................................................... 11-24

1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................ 11-24

3,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................ 11-25

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................................ 11-25

Mailbox (For 3,000-Sheet Finisher) ...................................................................................................... 11-26

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-27

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-791, PF-810

(1) PLATEN COVER

TYPE E

(1) DP-7100

(2) MT-730(B)

(4) DF-7120

(6) PF-791* (7) PF-810*

(1) DP-7110

(8) NK-7100, NK-7110

(3) DF-791

(1) DP-7120

(5) PH-7A, PH-7C,

PH-7D

11-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(10) FAX System 12
(11) IB-50
(12) IB-51
(14) IB-35 (16) Key Counter
(9) Card Authentication Kit(B)
(15) HD-12
Software option
(18) Internet FAX Kit(A)
(19) Data Security Kit(E)
(20) UG-33
(21) UG-34
(22) Scan Extension Kit(A)
(23) USB Keyboard
(17) DT-730(B)
(13) Keyboard 
Holder 10

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"

DP-7100 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"

DP-7120 "Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)"

PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"

Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.

For document processor operation, refer to the following:

Loading Originals in the Document Processor (page 5-3)

When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.

(2) MT-730 (B) "Mailbox"

Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple computer users

share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 3,000-Sheet Finisher.

(3) DF-791 "3,000-Sheet Finisher"

This is a large-capacity 3,000-Sheet Finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple

copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

(4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher"

This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a

printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

(5) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.

(6) PF-791 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading

method are the same as the standard cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

(7) PF-810 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet×2) capable of

holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-7)

(8) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not

appear on the touch panel.

NOTE

To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or

change in the default settings.

Paper Output (page 6-28)

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(9) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the

following:

Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide

(10) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a

computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable

quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time

can be reduced.

FAX Operation Guide

(11) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports

traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.

It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.

IB-50 User's Manual

(12) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and

11 g/b. This supports traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.

It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.

The IB-51 Setup utility supports Windows OS and Mac OS X.

IB-51 User's Manual

(13) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.

(14) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and

IEEE802.11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is

supported. IB-35 is standard in South America and North America.

(15) HD-12 "Hard Disk" (Option for TASKalfa 3212i)

With Hard Disk installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this Hard Disk. This enables

high-speed printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.

HD-12 is standard in South America and North America. HD-12 is an option for TASKalfa 3212i and TASKalfa 4012i in

Europe.

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-55)

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(16) Key Counter "Key Counter"

Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized

management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.

Inserting the Key Counter

(17) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.

(18) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added

when the FAX Kit is installed.

(19) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.

The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data

cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.

(20) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(21) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM

Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.

(22) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.

(23) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also

available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on

keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

11-7

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Applications

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

Starting Application Use

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Optional Function" [Next]

2Select the desired application > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

3Select [Official] in the license key entry screen.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen

does not appear, go to Step 5.

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Application

Data Security Kit

Internet FAX Kit

Card Authentication Kit

ThinPrint Option*1

*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

Emulation Upgrade Kit

OCR Scan Activation Kit*1

NOTE

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the

application.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

11-8

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Checking Details of Application

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Optional Function" [Next]

2Select the desired application and select [Detail].

You can view detailed information on the selected application.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Extend the trial period.

[Extend] > [Yes]

The trial period is extended.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item

Function Name

License

Remaining Counts

Expiration Date

Status

Model Name Login User Name Login Password

TASKalfa 3212i 3200 3200

TASKalfa 4012i 4000 4000

11-9

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.

Entry Screens

Lower-case Letter Entry Screen

NOTE

Keyboard Layout

"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the

[System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.

"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.

No. Display/Key Description

1Display Displays entered characters.

2[Upper-case] Select to use upper-case letters.

3[Lower-case] Select to use lower-case letters.

4[No./Symbol] Select to enter numbers and symbols.

5[Space] Select to insert a space.

6[Cancel] Select to cancel entered characters and return to the screen

before the entry.

7[OK] Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the

entry.

8Keyboard Select a character to enter.

9[Backspace] Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.

10 Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters.

11 Cursor Key Select to move the cursor on the display.

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ 

QWE R T Y U I O P { }

ASDFGHJKL : "

ZXCVBNM<>?

Input: characters

Limit: characters

128

k0101_01_al

110

34 5 6 7

11-10

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Number/Symbol Entry Screen

No. Display/Key Description

12 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard,

select the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other

numbers or symbols to enter.

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ 

QWE R T Y U I O P { }

ASDFGHJKL : "

ZXCVBNM<>?

Input: characters

Limit: characters

128

k0101_01_al

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #

$%&  ( ) * + , - . / :

;<=>?@[ \ ]^_` {

|}

Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_02_al

11-11

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Characters

Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.

1Select [Upper-case].

2Select [L]. The letter "L" is shown on the display.

3Select [Lower-case].

4Select [i], [s], [t] and [Space].

5Select [Upper-case].

6Select [A].

7Select [No./Symbol].

8Select [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard containing [-] and [1].

9Select [-] and [1].

10Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ 

QWE R T Y U I O P { }

ASDFGHJKL : "

ZXCVBNM<>?

Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_03_al

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! = `

q w e r t y u i o p [ ]

a s d f g h j k l ; 

z x c v b n m, . /

List Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_04_al

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #

$%&  ( ) * + , - . / :

;<=>?@[ \ ]^_` {

|}

List_A-1 Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_05_al

11-12

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the

following:

Specifications (page 11-19)

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 52 to 163 g/m2

Multipurpose tray: 45 to 256 g/m2 (A4/Letter or smaller), 52 to 163 g/m2 (larger than A4/

Letter), 209.5 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-13

Appendix > Paper

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredients

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those

types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be

discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90° ± 0.2°.

• A3 (297 × 420 mm)

• A4 (297 × 210 mm)

• A5 (210 × 148 mm)

• A6 (148 × 105 mm)

• B4 (257 × 364 mm)

• B5 (257 × 182 mm)

• B6 (182 × 128 mm)

• 216×340 mm

• Ledger

•Letter

• Legal

• Statement

• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")

• Oficio II

• Folio (210 × 330 mm)

• 8K (273 × 394 mm)

• 16K (273 × 197 mm)

• ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")

• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")

• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")

• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")

• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)

• Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm)

• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)

• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)

• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

•Custom

Multipurpose Tray: 98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Hagaki (Cardstock)

• Thick paper

• Labels

•Coated

• High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as

laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, envelopes, Hagaki (cardstock), thick paper, label paper,

and coated paper.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional

accuracy

±0.7 mm

Squareness of

corners

90° ±0.2°

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)

paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)

on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Use the multipurpose tray for envelopes.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper in the multipurpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by

placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough

edges may cause jams.

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few

millimeters.

Burrs

11-18

Appendix > Paper

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-12)

In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-12)

The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use

paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-12)

Coated Paper

Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than

plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.

The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making

the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated

side appears slightly glossy.

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.

IMPORTANT

When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture

may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid

environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.

11-19

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Machine

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

NOTE

For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:

FAX Operation Guide

Item Description

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 163 g/m2

Multipurpose

Tray

45 to 256 g/m2 (A4/Letter or smaller), 52 to 163 g/m2 (larger than A4/Letter),

209.5 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Paper Type Cassette

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom

(Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multipurpose

Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High

Quality, Coated, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter,

Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Multipurpose

Tray

A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R,

16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki

(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to

297 × 432 mm)

Printable Area Print margin for top: 3 ± 2.5 mm

Print margin for bottom: 3 ± 2.5 mm

Print margin for both sides: 4 mm or less

Warm-up Time

(23°C/73.4°F,

60%)

Power on 18 seconds or less

Low Power 10 seconds or less

Sleep TASKalfa 3212i: 12 seconds or less

TASKalfa 4012i: 15 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1

Multipurpose

Tray

100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2),

25 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)

11-20

Appendix > Specifications

Output Tray

Capacity

Inner tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)

Job separator

tray

50 sheets (80 g/m2)

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 2.0 GB

Large Capacity Storage TASKalfa 3212i: SSD 32 GB

TASKalfa 4012i: SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB

Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,

IPSec), 802.3az supported)

USB Port: 4 (Hi-Speed USB)

Option eKUIO: 2*3

Fax: 2*4

Wireless LAN: 1*2

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 10 to 80 %

Altitude 3,500 m/11,483 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H) 23.39 " × 27.41" × 26.89"

594 × 696 × 683 mm

Weight Approx. 130.1 lb/Approx. 59 kg (without toner container)

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multipurpose tray)

34.38" × 27.41"

873 × 696 mm

Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 11.6 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 6.3 A

The power consumption of the

product in networked standby (If

all network ports are connected.)

The information is available at the website below.

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/environment/

green_products/low_power_consumption.html

Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2 This is standard in South and North America.

*3 When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.

*4 When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.

Item Description

11-21

Appendix > Specifications

Copy Functions

Item Description

Copy Speed TASKalfa 3212i A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

B5-R

A5-R

32 sheets/min

23 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

32 sheets/min

20 sheets/min

15 sheets/min

TASKalfa 4012i A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

B5-R

A5-R

40 sheets/min

29 sheets/min

21 sheets/min

40 sheets/min

23 sheets/min

18 sheets/min

First Copy

Time (A4,

place on the

platen, feed

from

Cassette)

Black and White TASKalfa 3212i: 4.3 seconds or less

TASKalfa 4012i: 3.6 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9,600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)

Original Feed System Fixed

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Printer Functions

Scanner Functions

Item Description

Printing

Speed

TASKalfa 3212i A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

B5-R

A5-R

32 sheets/min

23 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

32 sheets/min

20 sheets/min

15 sheets/min

TASKalfa 4012i A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

B5-R

A5-R

40 sheets/min

29 sheets/min

21 sheets/min

40 sheets/min

23 sheets/min

18 sheets/min

First Print

Time (A4,

feed from

Cassette)

Black and White TASKalfa 3212i: 4.9 seconds or less

TASKalfa 4012i: 4.2 seconds or less

Resolution 600 dpi, 1200 dpi*1

*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

Operating System Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows

Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016,

Mac OS 10.5 or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,

IPSec), 802.3a supported)

Optional Interface: 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)

Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)*2

*2 This is standard in South and North America.

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS,

OpenXPS

Item Description

Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi

File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High

compressive PDF/OCR Text Recognition PDF(Option))

Scanning

Speed*1

TASKalfa 3212i (A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)

TASKalfa 4012i 1-sided B/W 80 Images/min

2-sided B/W 160 Images/min

Color 80 Images/min

Color 160 Images/min

11-23

Appendix > Specifications

Document Processor

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)

Interface Ethernet (1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T)

Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, WSD

*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)

*2 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/

Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016

Item

Description

Document Processor

(Automatic 2-Sided)

Document Processor

(Dual scan DP)

Type DP-7100 DP-7120 DP-7110

Original Feed Method Automatic feed

Supported Original Types Sheet originals

Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger

11.69" × 17"/297 × 432 mm (Long-sized 11.69" × 74.8"/297 × 1,900 mm)

Minimum: A6-R/

Statement-R

4.13" × 5.82"/

105 × 148 mm

Minimum: A5-R/

Statement-R

5.51" × 7.16"/

140 × 182 mm

Minimum: A6-R/

Statement-R

4.13" × 5.82"/

105 × 148 mm

Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m2

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2

1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m2

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2

1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m2

2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m2

Loading Capacity 140 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1

maximum

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

50 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1

maximum

270 sheets

(50 to 80 g/m2)*1

maximum

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46"

593 × 531 × 138.5 mm

23.63" × 19.77" × 5.04"

600 × 502 × 128 mm

23.63" × 20.20" × 6.70"

600 × 513 × 170 mm

Weight Approx. 19.9 lbs./

Approx. 9 kg

Approx. 16.1 lbs./

Approx. 7.3 kg

Approx. 32.0 lbs./

Approx. 14.5 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

(No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes/

No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter,

Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick

Item Description

11-24

Appendix > Specifications

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)

1,000-Sheet Finisher

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.23" × 23.19" × 13.08"

590 × 589 × 332 mm

Weight Approx. 44.1 lbs. / Approx. 20 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method

(No. Sheets: 3,500, 64 g/m2/No. Sheets: 1,575, 80 g/m2)

Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Thick

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.23" × 24.69" × 13.08"

590 × 626.9 × 332 mm

Weight Approx. 64 lbs. / Approx. 29 kg

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

Finisher tray

(Non-stapling)

A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500

sheets

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000

sheets

Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling Number of

Sheets

A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger,

Legal, Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,

Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions (W × D × H) 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"

548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm

Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less

Space Required (W × D)

(When pulling the tray)

26.23" × 24.36"

666 × 618.5 mm

Item Description

11-25

Appendix > Specifications

3,000-Sheet Finisher

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet Finisher)

Item Description

Number of Trays 2 trays

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

Tray A

(Non-Stapling)

A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K,

16K-R: 1,500

sheets

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 3,000

sheets

A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500

sheets

Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter-R,

Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Custom (98 × 148 mm

to 297 × 432 mm): 200 sheets

Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling

Maximum

Number

A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger,

Legal, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 256 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 256 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,

Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 37.49"

607.2 × 668.5 × 951.3 mm

Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 40 kg or less

Space Required (W × D)

(When pulling the tray)

28.55" × 26.32"

725 × 668.5 mm

Item Description

Paper

Size

Inch 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

3 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 8K, 16K

cm 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

4 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 8K, 16K

Paper Weight 45 - 300 g/m2

Media types Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

11-26

Appendix > Specifications

Mailbox (For 3,000-Sheet Finisher)

Item Description

Number of Trays 7 trays

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

A3, B4, Ledger, Legal: 50 sheets

A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,

Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets

Dimensions (W × D × H) 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"

510 × 400 × 470 mm

Weight Approx. 22.1 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-27

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

Accessibility

The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or

visually impaired. The angle of the touch panel is adjustable.

Apple Talk

AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another

computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is

performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP

requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0

to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a

specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly

for Bonjour.

Custom Box

The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or

multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,

data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

11-28

Appendix > Glossary

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).

Enhanced WSD

Kyocera's proprietary web services.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

Help

A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like

more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to

view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

11-29

Appendix > Glossary

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and

enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication

mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

Job Box

The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data

later using the printer's operation panel.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multipurpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Outline font

With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced

in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,

since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in

steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use

of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a

specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-

2), is currently being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

11-30

Appendix > Glossary

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA (Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA).

ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a

RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected

from the list or entered at each time.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source

settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.

A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in

the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,

in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network

address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In

this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network

address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet

address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other

over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

11-31

Appendix > Glossary

TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The

TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted

on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This

function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of

operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and

set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing

a button or entering passphrases.

Index-1

Index

Numerics

1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

2-sided/Book Original 6-66

3,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

Accessibility 11-27

Accessibility Functions 2-26

Address Book 3-23

Adding 3-23

Contact 3-23

Deleting 3-29

Editing 3-28

Group 3-27

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-11

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-74, 10-41

Auto Color Correction 8-75

Auto Drum Refresh 8-76

Background Density Adjustment 8-74

Contrast 8-75

Correcting Black Lines 8-74

Density Adjustment 8-74

Display Brightness 8-75

Drum Refresh 1 8-75, 10-42

Drum Refresh 2 8-75, 10-43

Memory Diagnostics 8-75

Sharpness Adjustment 8-74

Silent Mode 8-75

System Initialization 8-74

Tone Curve Adjustment 8-75, 10-41

AirPrint 4-10

Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-15

AppleTalk 11-27

Application 5-12, 8-76

Auto Error Clear 8-70

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-27

Auto Image Rotation 6-61

Default 8-19

Auto Panel Reset 8-70

Auto Paper Selection 11-27

Auto Sleep 2-40, 11-27

Auto-IP 11-27

Settings 8-47, 8-52

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-18

Background Density Adjustment 6-32, 8-74

Default 8-18

Bates Stamp 6-58

Bluetooth Settings 8-67

Bonjour 11-27

Settings 8-54

Booklet 6-41

Border Erase 6-39

Cables 2-6

Canceling Jobs 5-20, 5-39

Canceling Printing 4-9

Card Authentication Kit 11-5

Cardstock 11-17

Cassette

Loading Paper 3-4

Paper Size and Media Type 8-7

Cassette 1 2-2

Cassette 2 2-2

Cassette 3 2-5

Cassette 4 2-5

Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7

Centering 6-38

Character Entry Method 11-9

Checking and Editing Destinations 5-43

Checking the Counter 2-58

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-14

Cleaning 10-2

Document Processor 10-2

Glass Platen 10-2

Slit Glass 10-3

Cleaning Cloth Compartment 2-2

Coated Paper 11-18

Collate/Offset 6-24

Default 8-19

Color Selection 6-30

Default 8-18

Colored Paper 11-18

Combine 6-36

Command Center RX 2-61

Common Settings 8-10

Customize Status Display 8-29

Default Screen 8-10

Display Status/Log 8-29

Error Handling 8-16

Function Defaults 8-18

Function Key Assignment 8-31

Keyboard Layout 8-11

Language 8-10

Low Toner Alert 8-29

Manual Staple 8-28

Measurement 8-15

Message Board Settings 8-30

Numeric Keypad Settings 8-31

Offset Documents by Job 8-28

Offset One Page Documents 8-29

Orientation Confirmation 8-18

Original/Paper Settings 8-11

Paper Output 8-17

Prevent Light Reflection 8-31

Remote Printing 8-30

Show Power Off Message 8-31

Sound 8-10

System Stamp 8-22

USB Keyboard Type 8-21

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-44

Index-2

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-7

Power Cable 2-8

USB cable 2-8

Connection Method 2-6

Continuous Scan 6-61

Default 8-21

Contrast 6-31, 8-75

Control Section of the Finisher 2-5

Conventions Used in This Guide xxii

Copy 5-17

Copy Settings 8-32

Auto % Priority 8-32

Auto Image Rotation Action 8-32

Auto Paper Selection 8-32

Paper Selection 8-32

Paper Size for Small Original 8-32

Preset Limit 8-32

Quick Setup Registration 8-32

Reserve Next Priority 8-32

Copy Speed 11-21

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Count by Paper Size 9-45

Counter 2-58

Each Job Account 9-47

Print Accounting Report 9-48

Total Accounting 9-47

Unknown ID Job 9-52

Cover 6-47

Custom Box 5-47, 11-27

Copying Documents 5-59

Creating a New Custom Box 5-52

Deleting Custom Box 5-54

Deleting Documents 5-61

Editing Custom Box 5-53

Joining Documents 5-60

Moving Documents 5-58

Printing Documents 5-55

Saving Scanned Documents 5-56

Send to Me from BOX (E-mail) 5-58

Sending Documents 5-57

Storing Documents 5-54

Customize Status Display 8-29

Data Sanitization 8-66

Data Security 8-65

Data Security Kit 11-6

Date Format 8-70

Date/Time 8-70

Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-70

Auto Error Clear 8-70

Auto Panel Reset 8-70

Date Format 8-70

Date/Time 8-70

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-72

Error Clear Timer 8-71

Error Job Skip 8-71

Interrupt Clear Timer 8-71

Low Power Timer 8-71

Panel Reset Timer 8-71

Ping Timeout 8-73

Sleep Level 8-72

Sleep Rules 8-71

Sleep Timer 8-71

Time Zone 8-70

Unusable Time 8-71

Weekly Timer Settings 8-72

Default

Auto Image Rotation (Copy) 8-19

Backgrnd Density (Copy) 8-18

BackgrndDens.(Send/Store) 8-18

Border Erase Default 8-19

Border Erase to Back Page 8-19

Collate/Offset 8-19

Color Selection 8-18

Color TIFF Compression 8-19

Cont. Scan (Copy) 8-21

Continuous Scan (Copy) 8-21

Continuous Scan (FAX) 8-21

Continuous Scan (Send/Store) 8-21

DP Read Action 8-20

EcoPrint 8-19

E-mail Subject/Body 8-20

FAX TX Resolution 8-18

File Format 8-18

File Name Entry 8-20

File Separation 8-21

High Comp. PDF Image 8-19

i-FAX Subject/Body 8-20

Image Quality (File Format) 8-19

JPEG/TIFF Print 8-20

Margin 8-19

OCR Text Recognition 8-20

Org. Image (Send/Store) 8-18

Orig. Orient.(Send/Store) 8-18

Orig. Orientation (Copy) 8-18

Original Image (Copy) 8-18

PDF/A 8-20

Prevent Bleed(Send/Store) 8-19

Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 8-18

Primary OCR Language 8-20

Repeat Copy 8-21

Scan Resolution 8-18

Skip Blank Page (Copy) 8-21

Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) 8-21

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-19

XPS Fit to Page 8-20

Zoom 8-19

Index-3

Default Gateway 11-27

Settings 8-47, 8-52

Default Screen 8-10

Delete after Printed 6-75

Delete after Transmitted 6-75

Density 6-29

Density Adjustment 8-74

Destination

Adding a Destination 3-23

Address Book 3-23

Address Book Type 8-69

Check before Send 5-44, 8-33

Checking and Editing 5-43

Choosing from the Address Book 5-40

Choosing from the One Touch Key 5-42

Choosing from the Speed Dial 5-42

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-44

Entry Check for New Dest. 8-33

Multi Sending 5-37

Narrow Down 8-69

One Touch Key 3-30

Recall 5-45

Search 5-41

Sort 8-69

Device 7-13

Device Information 2-18

DHCP 11-28

Settings 8-47, 8-52

DHCP (IPv6) 11-28

Settings 8-48, 8-53

Display Setting Screen 2-18

Display Status/Log 8-29

Disposing of the Punch Waste

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-13

3,000-Sheet Finisher 10-14

Document Box

Basic Operation 5-48

Custom Box 5-47

Job Box 4-12, 5-47

Removable Memory Box 5-47

Document Box/Removable Memory

Custom Box 8-38

FAX Box 8-38

Job Box 8-38

Polling Box 8-38

Quick Setup Registration 8-39

Document Processor 2-2

Loading Originals 5-3

Originals Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Part Names 2-2

Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4

Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4

Document Table 11-6

DP Read Action 6-65, 8-20

dpi 11-28

Drum Refresh 1 8-75, 10-42

Drum Refresh 2 8-75, 10-43

DSM Scan 5-34

Protocol Settings 8-55

Duplex 6-44

EcoPrint 6-30, 11-28

Default 8-19

Printer 8-40

Edit Destination

Address Book 3-23

Address Book Defaults 8-69

Contact 3-23

Group 3-27

One Touch Key 3-30

E-mail Settings 2-65

E-mail Subject/Body 6-74

Default 8-20

Emulation 11-28

Selection 8-39

Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6

Encrypted PDF Password 6-77

Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-40, 8-72

Energy Saving Control Function 1-18

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-18

Enhanced VNC over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-58

Enhanced WSD 11-28

Protocol Settings 8-57

Enhanced WSD over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-57

Enter key 2-24

Entering Numbers 2-23

Entry

File Name 6-63

Subject 6-74

Envelope Stack Guide 3-11

Envelopes 11-17

Environment 1-3

Erase Shadowed Areas 6-49

Error Clear Timer 8-71

Error Handling 8-16

Duplexing Error 8-16

Finished Pages Exceeded 8-16

Finishing Error 8-16

Inserted Paper Mismatch 8-17

No Staple Error 8-16

Paper Jam before Staple 8-17

Paper Mismatch Error 8-16

Punch Waste Full Error 8-16

eSCL

Protocol Settings 8-57

eSCL over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-57

FAX 8-39

FAX Kit 11-5

FAX RX Result Report 8-43

File

Format 6-68

PDF 6-70

Separation 6-73

Index-4

File Format 6-68

Default 8-18

File Management Utility 5-36

File Name Entry 6-63

Default 8-20

File Separation 6-73

Default 8-21

File Size Confirmation 6-75

Finisher Tray 2-5

First Copy Time 11-21

First Print Time 11-22

FMU Connection 5-36

Form Overlay 6-48

Storing a Form 5-62

Front Cover 2-2

FTP 11-28

FTP Client (Transmission)

Protocol Settings 8-54

FTP Encrypted TX 6-75

FTP Server (Reception)

Protocol Settings 8-54

Function Key Assignment 2-12, 8-31

Functions Key 2-19

Glossary 11-27

Google Cloud Print 4-10

GPL/LGPL 1-13

Grayscale 11-28

Group Authorization Settings 9-19

Group Authorization 9-19

Group List 9-20

Guest Authorization Set. 9-22

Guest Authorization 9-22

Guest Property 9-23

Guides Provided with the Machine xix

Handles 2-2

Hard Disk 11-5

Hard Disk Initialization 8-65

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization 8-65

Help 11-28

Help Screen 2-25

Highlighter 6-29

Home 8-31

Customize Desktop 2-15

Customize Taskbar 2-15

Wallpaper 2-15

Home Screen 2-14

Host Name 8-47

HTTP

Protocol Settings 8-56

HTTPS

Protocol Settings 8-56

i-FAX

Protocol Settings 8-55

Image Repeat 6-54

Inner Tray 2-2

Insert Sheets/Chapters 6-51

Install

Macintosh 2-53

Software 2-45

Uninstalling 2-52

Windows 2-46

Interface Block Setting 8-64

Internet 8-76

Proxy 8-59

Internet Browser 5-68

Internet FAX Kit 11-6

Interrupt Copy 5-20

IP Address 11-28

Settings 8-47, 8-52

IPP 11-29

Protocol Settings 8-56

IPP over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-56

IPSec 8-54

Job

Available Status 7-2

Canceling 7-11

Checking History 7-9

Checking Status 7-2

Detailed Information 7-8

Detailed Information of Histories 7-10

Details of the Status Screens 7-3

Displaying History Screen 7-10

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-11

Priority Override 7-11

Reordering Print Jobs 7-12

Sending the Log History 7-10, 8-44

Job Accounting 9-33

Adding an Account 9-36

Apply Limit 9-50

Copy/Printer Count 9-51

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-46

Default Setting 9-44

Deleting an Account 9-39

Editing an Account 9-38

Enabling Job Accounting 9-34

FAX Driver 9-43

Job Accounting Access 9-35

Logout 9-49

Overview of Job Accounting 9-33

Print Accounting Report 9-48

Printing 9-40

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-37

TWAIN 9-41

WIA 9-42

Index-5

Job Box 4-12, 5-62, 11-29

Deletion of Job Retention 8-38

Form for Form Overlay 5-62

Private Print Box 4-13

Proof and Hold Box 4-16

Quick Copy Box 4-15

Quick Copy Job Retention 8-38

Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-38

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job 4-12

Stored Job Box 4-14

Job Finish Notice 6-62

Job Finish Notice Setting 8-43

Job Separator Tray 2-2, 2-5

JPEG/TIFF Print 6-77

Default 8-20

Key Counter 11-6

Keyboard Holder 11-5

Keyboard Layout 8-11

Knopflerfish License 1-15

KPDL 11-29

Label 11-16

LAN Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-7

LAN Interface 8-49

Language 8-10

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4

Loading Paper 3-7

LDAP

Protocol Settings 8-56

Legal Information 1-12

Legal Restriction on Copying 1-10

Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-10

Limited Use of This Product 1-11

Loading Originals 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3

Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2

Loading Paper 10-9

Local Authorization 9-18

Logout 2-28

Long Original 6-76

Low Power Mode 2-39

Low Power Timer 8-71

Low Toner Alert 8-29

LPD

Protocol Settings 8-55

Magnifying the View 2-26

Mailbox 11-4

Main Power Switch 2-2

Management 9-1

Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-48, 8-53

Manual Staple 5-70, 8-28

Margin 6-38

Default 8-19

Margin/Centering 6-38

Measurement 8-15

Media Type Setting 8-15

Memo Page 6-52

Memory Diagnostics 8-75

Message Board Settings 8-30

Mirror Image 6-62

Mixed Size Originals 6-20

Combinations 6-21

Copy Size 6-22

Mixed Size Stapling 6-26

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-14

Mopria 4-10

MP Tray Setting

Paper Size and Media Type 8-8

Multi Sending 5-37

Multipurpose Tray 2-3, 11-29

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 5-8

Loading Paper 5-6

Paper Size and Media Type 8-8

Negative Image 6-62

NetBEUI 11-29

Protocol Settings 8-54

NetWare

Settings 8-60

Network Interface 2-6

Network Interface Connector 2-4

Network Interface Kit 11-5

NFC

Printing 4-11

Settings 2-38, 8-68

Notice 1-2

Numeric Keypad Settings 8-31

OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6

Offset Documents by Job 8-28

Offset One Page Documents 8-29

One Touch Key

Adding 3-30

Deleting 3-31

Editing 3-31

OpenSSL License 1-13

Operation Panel 2-2

Index-6

Option

1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

3,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

Card Authentication Kit 11-5

Data Security Kit 11-6

Document Processor (Dual Scan) 11-4

Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) 11-4

Document Table 11-6

Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6

FAX Kit 11-5

Hard Disk 11-5

Internet FAX Kit 11-6

Key Counter 11-6

Keyboard Holder 11-5

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4

Mailbox 11-4

Network Interface Kit 11-5

OCR Scan Activation Kit 11-6

Optional Numeric Keypad 11-4

Original Cover 11-4

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4

Punch Unit 11-4

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-5

Option Interface Slot 2-4

Optional Applications 11-7

Optional Function 8-67

Optional Network

Basic 8-60

Wireless Network 8-61

Optional Numeric Keypad 11-4

Orientation Confirmation 8-18

Original

Auto Detect 8-13

Custom Original Size 8-11

Loading Originals 5-2

Settings 8-11

Size xxiv, 6-18

Original Cover 11-4

Original Eject Table 2-2

Original Image 6-29

Default 8-18

Original Loaded Indicator 2-2

Original Orientation 6-23

Default 8-18

Original Preview 2-20

Original Size 6-18

Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2

Original SSLeay License 1-13

Original Stopper 2-2, 5-5

Original Table 2-2

Original Width Guides 2-2

Original/Paper Settings 8-11

Outline font 11-29

Page # 6-49

Panel Reset Timer 8-71

Paper

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-14

Appropriate Paper 11-13

Custom Paper Size 8-12

Default Paper Source 8-12

Loading Cardstock 5-8

Loading Envelopes 5-8

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder 3-7

Loading Paper 3-2, 5-6

Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-4

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray 5-6

Media for Auto 8-13

Media Type Setting 8-12

Paper Source for Cover 8-13

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units 3-3

Separator Paper Source 8-14

Settings 8-11

Show Paper Setup Message 8-14

Size and Media Type 8-7, 11-12

Special Paper 11-15

Special Paper Action 8-14

Specifications 11-12

Weight 8-15

Paper Feed Mode 8-40

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4

Paper Jams 10-44

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-72

3,000-Sheet Finisher (Inner) 10-75

3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray A) 10-76

3,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray B) 10-80

Bridge Unit 10-64

Cassette 1 10-45

Cassette 2 10-47

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-51

Cassette 3 (500-sheet×2) 10-49

Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-54

Cassette 4 (500-sheet×2) 10-52

Document Processor (DP-7100) 10-66

Document Processor (DP-7110) 10-70

Document Processor (DP-7120) 10-68

Duplex Unit 10-58

Inner Tray / Fixing Unit 10-60

Jam Location Indicators 10-44

Mailbox 10-65

Multipurpose Tray 10-57

Right Cover 2 10-62

Right Cover 3 (500-sheet×2/1,500-sheet×2) 10-63

Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4

Paper Output 6-28, 8-17

Paper Selection 6-19

Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-11

Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3

Paper Width Guide 2-3, 3-5

Part Names 2-2

PDF/A 11-29

PIN Code Authorization 9-31

Ping 8-59

Platen 2-2

POP3 11-29

Index-7

POP3 (E-mail RX)

Protocol Settings 8-54

PostScript 11-29

Power Cable

Connecting 2-8

Power Management 1-18

Power Off 2-9

Power On 2-9

Power Switch 2-2

PPM 11-29

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2

Precautions for Use 1-4

Preprinted Paper 11-18

Prevent Bleed-thru 6-32

Default 8-18, 8-19

Prevent Light Reflection 8-31

Primary Network (Client) 8-63

Print Report

Data Sanitization Report 8-43

Font List 8-42

Network Status 8-42

Optional Network Status 8-43

Service Status 8-42

Status Page 8-42

Print Settings 4-2

Printer 8-39

Auto Cassette Change 8-41

Copies 8-40

CR Action 8-40

Duplex 8-40

EcoPrint 8-40

Emulation 8-39

Form Feed TimeOut 8-40

Job Name 8-40

KIR 8-41

LF Action 8-40

MP Tray Priority 8-41

Orientation 8-40

Override A4/Letter 8-40

Paper Feed Mode 8-40

Printing Job Terminator 8-41

Properties 4-2

Resolution 8-41

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-40

User Name 8-40

Wide A4 8-41

Printer Driver 11-30

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings 4-3

Help 4-3

Properties 4-2

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory 5-64

Printing from PC 4-4

Non-standard Sized Paper 4-6

Standard Sized Paper 4-4

Printing Speed 11-22

Priority Override 6-63, 7-11

Product Library xx

Program 5-9

Deleting 5-11

Editing 5-11

Recalling 5-10

Registering 5-10

Proof Copy 5-19

Punch 6-26

Punch Unit 11-4

Quick No. Search key 2-24

Quick Setup Registration 8-32, 8-33, 8-39

Quick Setup Wizard 2-42

RA (Stateless) 11-30

Settings 8-48, 8-53

RAM Disk 11-30

Raw

Protocol Settings 8-56

Recycled Paper 11-18

Regarding Trade Names 1-12

Regular Maintenance 10-2

Remote Printing 8-30

Repeat Copy 6-64

Default 8-21

Printing 5-62

Repeat Copy Job Retention 8-38

Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-7

Replacing Staples

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-10

3,000-Sheet Finisher 10-11

Report 8-42

Admin Report Settings 8-43

Device Log History Settings 8-45

Print Report 8-42

Result Report Settings 8-43

Secure Comm. Error Log 8-46

Sending Log History 8-44

Resolution 6-73, 11-21, 11-22

Resource Saving - Paper 1-18

Responding to Messages 10-25

Restart Entire Device 8-67

Restart Network 8-53, 8-59

Right Cover 1 2-3

Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3

Right Cover 2 2-2

Right Cover 2 Lever 2-2

RX Result Report Type 8-43

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-66

Scan Resolution 6-73

Default 8-18

Scan to Folder (FTP) 5-26

Scan to Folder (SMB) 5-23

Security Level 8-63

Index-8

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-10

Send and Forward

File format 8-35

PDF Encryption Functions 8-36

Send and Print 6-74

Send and Store 6-74

Send as E-mail 5-22, 11-30

Send Result Report 8-43

Send Settings 8-33

Broadcast 8-34

Color Type 8-33

Default Screen 8-33

Dest. Check before Send 8-33

Entry Check for New Dest. 8-33

HighCompressionPDF Mode 8-35

New Destination Entry 8-34

OCR Text Recognition Act. 8-35

Quick Setup Registration 8-33

Recall Destination 8-34

Send and Forward 8-34

Send to Me (E-mail) 5-38

Sending 5-21

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-13

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer 5-23

Sending Size 6-67

Setting Date and Time 2-29

Sharpness 6-31

Shortcuts 5-15

Adding 5-15

Deleting Shortcuts 5-16

Editing Shortcuts 5-16

Show Power Off Message 8-31

Silent Mode 8-75

Simple Login 2-28

Simple Login Settings

Simple Login 9-27

Simple Login Setup 9-28

Skip Blank Page 6-65

Default 8-21

Sleep 2-39

Sleep Level 2-40, 8-72

Energy Saver 8-72

Quick Recovery 8-72

Sleep Rules 2-40, 8-71

Sleep Timer 8-71

Slit Glass 2-2

SMB Client (Transmission)

Protocol Settings 8-54

SMTP 11-30

SMTP (E-mail TX)

Protocol Settings 8-54

SNMPv1/v2c

Protocol Settings 8-57

SNMPv3

Protocol Settings 8-57

Software Verification 8-66

Solving Malfunctions 10-16

Sound 8-10

Spare Waste Toner Box Tray (W1) 2-4

Specifications 11-19

1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-24

3,000-Sheet Finisher 11-25

Copy Functions 11-21

Document Processor 11-23

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-24

Machine 11-19

Mailbox 11-26

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-23

Printer Functions 11-22

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/3,000-Sheet

Finisher) 11-25

Scanner Functions 11-22

SSD Initialization 8-65

SSL

Security Settings 8-58

Staple Jam

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-83

3,000-Sheet Finisher 10-86

Staple/Punch 6-25

Status Monitor 4-17

Accessing 4-17

Exiting 4-17

Notification Settings 4-20

Status Page 11-30

Status/Job Cancel 7-1

Storing Size 6-76

Subnet Mask 11-30

Settings 8-47, 8-52

Supplies

Checking the Remaining Amount 7-14

Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 2-3

Symbols 1-2

System Initialization 8-74

System Menu 8-2

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-74

Application 8-76

Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-7

Common Settings 8-10

Copy 8-32

Counter 2-58

Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-70

Document Box/Removable Memory 8-38

Edit Destination 8-69

FAX 8-39

Home 2-14

Internet 8-76

Operation Method 8-2

Printer 8-39

Quick Setup Wizard 2-42

Report 8-42

Send 8-33

System/Network 8-47

User Login/Job Accounting 8-70

User Property 8-70, 9-12

System Stamp 8-22

Index-9

System/Network 8-47

Bluetooth Settings 8-67

Data Security 8-65

Interface Block Setting 8-64

Network 8-47

NFC 8-68

Optional Function 8-67

Optional Network 8-60

Primary Network (Client) 8-63

Restart Entire Device 8-67

Security Level 8-63

TCP/IP 11-30

Settings 8-47, 8-52

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Settings 2-30, 8-47, 8-52

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-28

Settings 8-48, 8-53

Text Stamp 6-55

Thick Paper 11-17

Thin Print over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-55

ThinPrint

Protocol Settings 8-55

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Time Zone 8-70

Tone Curve Adjustment 8-75, 10-41

Toner Container 2-4

Toner Container Replacement 10-4

Touch Panel 2-14

Transparencies 11-15

Tray 1 to 7 2-5

Tray A 2-5

Tray B 2-5

Troubleshooting 10-16

Machine Operation Trouble 10-16

Printed Image Trouble 10-20

Solving Malfunctions 10-16

TWAIN 11-31

Scanning 5-28

Setting TWAIN Driver 2-55

USB 11-31

USB Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-8

USB Interface 2-6

USB Interface Connector 2-4

USB Keyboard Type 8-21

USB Memory

Check the Information 5-67

Printing 5-64

Remove 5-67

Save 5-66

USB Memory Slot 2-2

USB Port 2-4

User Login Administration 9-2

Adding a User 9-8

Changing User Properties 9-11

Enabling User Login Administration 9-3

FAX Driver 9-17

Group Authorization Settings 9-19

Guest Authorization Set. 9-22

ID Card Settings 9-30

Local Authentication 9-18

Logout 2-28

Obtain NW User Property 9-25

Overview of User Login Administration 9-2

Password Policy Settings 9-7

PIN Code Authentication 9-31

Printing 9-14

Simple Login Settings 9-27

TWAIN 9-15

User Account Lockout Setting 9-5

WIA 9-16

User Login/Job Accounting 8-70

Job Accounting 9-33

Unknown User Settings 9-52

User Login 9-2

User Property 8-70

VNC (RFB)

Protocol Settings 8-58

VNC (RFB) over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-58

Waste Toner Box 2-4

Weekly Timer Settings 2-40, 8-72

White space 6-52

WIA 11-31

Scanning 5-28

Setting WIA Driver 2-57

Wide A4 8-41

Wi-Fi

Settings 2-32, 8-50

Wi-Fi Direct

Printing 4-10

Settings 2-36, 8-49

Wireless Connection 1-10

Wireless Network

Settings 2-32, 8-61

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-5

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) 11-31

WSD Print

Protocol Settings 8-55

WSD Scan 5-31

Protocol Settings 8-55

XPS Fit to Page 6-77

Default 8-20

Index-10

? Index

Zoom 6-33

Default 8-19

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

Headquarters

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

Phone: +1-973-808-8444

Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America

8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100

Miami, Florida 33166, USA

Phone: +1-305-421-6640

Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada

, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

Phone: +1-905-670-4425

Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco

Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,

Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México

Phone: +52-555-383-2741

Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.

Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,

Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP

06543-306, Brazil

Phone: +55-11-2424-5353

Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile

Phone: +562-2350-7000

Fax: +562-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,

Australia

Phone: +61-2-9888-9999

Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions

New Zealand Ltd.

Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,

New Zealand

Phone: +64-9-415-4517

Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited

13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-2496-5678

Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(China) Corporation

8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,

Shanghai,200003, China

Phone: +86-21-5301-1777

Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.

335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,

Bangkok 10800,

Thailand

Phone: +66-2-586-0333

Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Singapore Pte. Ltd.

12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,

Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118

Phone: +65-6741-8733

Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Hong Kong Limited

16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-3582-4000

Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Taiwan Corporation

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,

Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.

Phone: +886-2-2507-6709

Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.

#10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,

Seoul, Korea

Phone: +822-6933-4050

Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions

India Private Limited

Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,

Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India

Phone: +91-0124-4671000

Fax: +91-0124-4671001

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,

Germany

Phone: +49-2159-9180

Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH

Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,

Austria

Phone: +43-1-863380

Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden

Phone: +46-8-546-550-00

Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf

Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway

Phone: +47-22-62-73-00

Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S

Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,

Denmark

Phone: +45-70223880

Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.

Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,

Portugal

Phone: +351-21-843-6780

Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions

South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,

90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa

Phone: +27-11-540-2600

Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,

Russia

Phone: +7(495)741-0004

Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,

Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku

Osaka 540-8585, Japan

Phone: +81-6-6764-3555

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-654-0000

Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-5877200

Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited

Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,

Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,

United Kingdom

Phone: +44-118-931-1500

Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.

Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,

Phone: +39-02-921791

Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.

Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,

Belgium

Phone: +32-2-7209270

Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.

Espace Technologique de St Aubin

Route de IOrme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,

France

Phone: +33-1-69852600

Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,

28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain

Phone: +34-91-6318392

Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,

Finland

Phone: +358-9-47805200

Fax: +358-9-47805212

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,

Switzerland

Phone: +41-44-9084949

Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions

Turkey A.S.

Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy

34394 ili stanbul, Turkey

Phone: +90-212-356-7000

Fax: +90-212-356-6725

2018.11

2V6KDEN002